Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 257

Contents Owner's Manual

for Vehicle

A-Z The Ultimate


Driving Machine®

THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN.


OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


3 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the
printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.


Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/15, 03 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL


We wanted to provide you with some updates we recommend that you make sure that any
and clarifications with respect to the printed such parts and/or accessories are appropri-
BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and ate for use on your vehicle.
clarifications will supersede the materials con- 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's dis-
tained in that document. cussion of homologation, where it states
1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser- that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for
vice center,” “your service center,” “service your vehicle there,” the text should read
specialist,” or “service” are used in the that you “may not be able to lodge warranty
Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that claims for your vehicle there.”
the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accesso-
center or another service center or repair ries” section, in the sixth sentence, the
shop that employs trained personnel that word “cannot” should read “does not.”
can perform maintenance and repair work
6. At page 54, in the “Check and replace
on your vehicle in accordance with BMW
safety belts” section, the text beginning,
specifications.
“This should only be done by your service
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con- center …” should be disregarded and the
tains an affirmative instruction to contact a following text should be read in lieu thereof:
“service center” or “your service center,” “BMW recommends having this work per-
we wanted to clarify that BMW recom- formed by a service center as it is important
mends that, if you are faced with one of the that this safety feature functions properly.”
situations addressed by that text, you con-
7. At page 91, under the heading:  “Special
tact or seek the assistance of a BMW
windshield,” the paragraph beginning,
dealer's service center or another service
“Therefore, have the special windshield …”
center or repair shop that employs trained
should be disregarded and the following
personnel that can perform maintenance
text should be read in lieu thereof:  “BMW
and repair work on your vehicle in accor-
recommends that you have the special
dance with BMW specifications.
windshield replaced by the service center.”
While BMW of North America LLC, at no
8. At page 168 under the heading: “Objects
cost to you, will pay for repairs required by
within the range of movement of the ped-
the limited warranties provided with respect
als” and at page 232 under the heading:
to your vehicle and for maintenance under
“Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph
the Maintenance Program during the appli-
that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should
cable warranty and maintenance coverage
be disregarded and the following language
periods, you are free to elect, both during
should be read in lieu thereof: “The manu-
those periods and thereafter, to have main-
facturer of your vehicle recommends that
tenance and repair work provided by other
you use floor mats that have been identified
service centers or repair shops.
by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes refer- and that can be properly fixed in place.”
ence to parts and accessories having been
9. At page 173, under the heading: “Have
approved by BMW, those references are
maintenance carried out,” the sentence
intended to reflect that those parts and
beginning, “The maintenance should be
accessories are recommended by BMW of
carried out …” should be disregarded and
North America LLC. You may elect to use
the following text should be read in lieu
other parts and accessories, but, if you do,

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Addendum

thereof:  “BMW recommends that you have Information about recommended snow
the maintenance carried out by your service chains is available from a service center.
center.” 14. At page 205, under the heading “Hood,” the
10. At page 189, under the heading “Tire infla- sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”
tion specifications,” the sentence begin- should be disregarded.
ning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications 15. At page 208, under the heading: “Engine oil
apply to approved tire sizes …” should be change,” the text should be disregarded
disregarded. and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:
11. At page 197, under the heading: “Mount- BMW recommends that you have the oil
ing,” the paragraph beginning, “Have changed at your BMW dealer's service cen-
mounting and balancing …” should be dis- ter or at another service center that has
regarded and the following text should be trained personnel that can perform the work
read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends in accordance with BMW specifications.
that you have mounting and balancing per-
16. At page 210, under the heading: “Service
formed by your service center or a tire
and Warranty Information Booklet for US
mounting specialist.”
models and Warranty and Service Guide
12. At page 198, under the heading: “Approved Booklet for Canadian models,” the second
wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” paragraph should be disregarded and the
should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, following text read in lieu thereof:
the term “Recommended” should be read
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
in its place. In addition, the text of that sec-
mends that you have maintenance and
tion should be disregarded and the follow-
repair performed by your BMW dealer's ser-
ing text should be read in lieu thereof:
vice center or another service center or
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly repair shop that employs trained personnel
suggests that you use wheels and tires that that can perform maintenance and repair
have been recommended by the vehicle work on your vehicle in accordance with
manufacturer for your vehicle type; other- BMW specifications. The manufacturer of
wise, for example, despite having the same your vehicle recommends that you maintain
official size ratings, variations can lead to records of all maintenance and repair work
body contact and with it, the risk of severe performed on your vehicle.
accidents.
17. At page 213 and page 216, where it reads:
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not “Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
evaluate non-recommended wheels and xenon headlights,” that text should be dis-
tires to determine if they are suitable for use regarded and in lieu thereof the following
on your vehicle. text should be read: “Xenon headlight work
13. At page 202, under the heading: “Snow or replacement can cause serious and fatal
Chains,” the text should be disregarded and injuries.” In the text that follows, where it
the following text should be read in lieu reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon light-
thereof: ing system … ,” the following words should
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains be read as preceding that passage: “It is
have been tested by the manufacturer of strongly suggested that you …”
your vehicle and are determined by the 18. At page 221, under the “Battery replace-
manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe ment” section, the text should be disre-
and are recommended by the manufacturer garded and in lieu thereof the following text
of your vehicle. should be read:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Addendum

Use of recommended vehicle batteries


The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you use vehicle batteries that it
has tested and recommends for use in your
vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions may not
be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the manufac-
turer of your vehicle recommends that you
have the battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all com-
fort functions are fully available, and that
any “check control” messages of these
comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 182 Refueling
page 242. 184 Fuel
189 Wheels and tires
204 Engine compartment
6 Notes
206 Engine oil
At a glance 209 Coolant
14 Cockpit 210 Maintenance
18 iDrive 212 Replacing components
27 Voice activation system 223 Breakdown assistance
30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 229 Care

Controls Reference
34 Opening and closing 236 Technical data
50 Adjusting 242 Everything from A to Z
60 Transporting children safely
64 Driving
77 Displays
92 Lights
97 Safety
119 Driving stability control systems
124 Driving comfort
145 Climate control
152 Interior equipment
160 Storage compartments

Driving tips
166 Things to remember when driving
169 Loading
172 Saving fuel

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Notes

Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
Orientation
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ personal injury and serious damage to the
ular topic is by using the index. vehicle.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
the first chapter. information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
Updates made after the editorial
help protect the environment.
deadline
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
select individual functions.
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
vehicle. activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
User's manual for Navigation, voice activation system.
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Symbols on vehicle components
munication and the short commands of the Indicates that you should consult the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
arate user's manual, which is also included information on a particular part or assembly.
with the onboard literature.

Vehicle features and options


Additional sources of
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
information all standard, country-specific and optional
The service center will be happy to answer any equipment that is offered in the model series.
other questions you may have. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
The respectively applicable country provisions
tries as an app. Additional information on the
must be observed when using the respective
Internet:
features and systems.
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.

6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Notes

On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Therefore, have this work performed only by a
are arranged differently from what is shown in BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
the illustrations. ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
Status of the Owner's danger of subsequent damage and related
Manual safety hazards.

Basic information Parts and accessories


The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐
policy of constant development that is con‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose.
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from advice.
those in your vehicle.
BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline BMW can assume responsibility for them.
However, we cannot assume any responsibility
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
not been specifically approved by BMW.
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the
vehicle. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply
For your own safety when country-specific government approval
has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail
Warranty
to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐
Your vehicle is technically configured for the ating conditions to which components might
operating conditions and registration require‐ be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products
ments applying in the country of first delivery - could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's
homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated own stringent quality standards.
in a different country it might be necessary to
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ California Proposition 65 Warning
ating conditions and permit requirements. If
California laws require us to state the following
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐
warning:
gation requirements in a certain country you
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
there. Further information can be obtained bile components and parts, including compo‐
from your Service Centre. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
materials and high-performance electronics,
products of component wear contain or emit
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Notes

chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty.
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a
Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment:
listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and levels for instance.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,
ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration.
country and continental region in order to de‐
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating ing the stability control system.
conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is
warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
Maintenance pair services, service processes, warranty
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
road safety, operational reliability and the New mation can be read out from the event and
Vehicle Limited Warranty. fault memories by the service personnel, in‐

8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Notes

cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
nostic tools. You can obtain further information gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
there if you need it. After an error is corrected, However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
the information in the fault memory is deleted ment, could combine the EDR data with the
or overwritten on a continuous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
With the vehicle in use there are situations quired during a crash investigation.
where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special
with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment,
Additional functions that are contractually can read the information if they have access to
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle the vehicle or the EDR.
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
The vehicle identification number can be found
less.
in the engine compartment.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as: The vehicle identification number can also be
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were found behind the windshield.
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
Reporting safety defects
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing For US customers
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
The following only applies to vehicles owned
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. and operated in the US.
These data can help provide a better under‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
standing of the circumstances in which which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
crashes and injuries occur. jury or death, you should immediately inform
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
recorded by the EDR under normal driving North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐

9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Notes

wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone


1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customers


Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Notes

11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

All around the steering wheel

1 Roller sunblinds  47 Active Blind Spot Detec‐


2 Rear window safety switch  46 tion  116

3 Power windows  46 Intelligent Safety  106


4 Exterior mirror operation  57
5 Glove compartment on the driver's Lane departure warning  114
side  160
Driver assistance systems
6 Lights

14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Cockpit At a glance

Front fog lights  95 Reduce distance  124

Parking lights  92 Increase distance  124

Low beams  92 Cruise control rocker switch  130,  124


9 Instrument cluster  77
Automatic headlight con‐ 10 Steering wheel buttons, right
trol  93
Entertainment source
Daytime running lights  93
Adaptive Light Control  93
Volume
High-beam Assistant  94
Instrument lighting  95
Voice activation  27

7 Steering column stalk, left


Telephone, see user's manual for
Turn signal  69 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication

High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists  86


light flasher  69 11 Steering column stalk, right
High-beam Assistant  94 Wiper  69

Roadside parking lights  93 Rain sensor  70

On-board computer  86 Clean the windshields and head‐


lights  71

8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Start/stop the engine and switch


the ignition on/off  65
Store speed  130,  124
Auto Start/Stop function  66
Resume speed  130,  124
13 Horn, total area
Cruise control on/off, inter‐ 14 Steering wheel heating  59
rupt  130

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐


15 Adjust steering wheel  59
terrupting  124
16 Unlock hood  205

15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance Cockpit

All around the center console

1 Control Display  18 9 PDC Park Distance Control  132


2 Ventilation  150 Rearview camera  135
3 Hazard warning system  223 Parking assistant  140
Surround View  135
Central locking system  39
Side View  137

4 Glove compartment  160
10 Driving Dynamics Control  121
5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
6 Climate control  145 trol  119
7 Controller with buttons  18
11 Steptronic transmission selector
8 Parking brake  68 lever  72
Manual transmission selector lever  72

16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Cockpit At a glance

All around the roofliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights  95


quest  223

2 Glass sunroof, powered  47 5 Interior lights  95

3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐


senger airbag  99

17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance iDrive

iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control Display

This chapter describes all standard, country- Hints


specific and optional features offered with the
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
series. It also describes features that are not
care instructions.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
also applies to safety-related functions and Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
systems. The respectively applicable country be damaged.
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
respective features and systems. the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
The concept Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
The iDrive combines the functions of many the normal functions are re-established.
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Switching on
Using the iDrive during a trip 1. Switch on the ignition.
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ 2. Press the controller.
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other traffic, never attempt Switch off
to use the controls or enter information unless
traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ 1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"

Control elements at a glance


Control elements

Controller with navigation system


The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
1 Control Display menu items and enter the settings.
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the equipment version, with touchpad the touchpad on the controller.

18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
iDrive At a glance

1. Turn. Press button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system


The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
2. Press.

2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.

3. Move in two directions.


Buttons on controller

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance iDrive

Buttons on controller Selecting menu items


Highlighted menu items can be selected.
Press button Function
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
MENU Open the main menu. item is highlighted.
Audio Open audio menu last listened
to, switch between audio me‐
nus.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

2. Press the controller.


Operating concept
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
Opening the main menu In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
Press button. selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".

Changing between panels


After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
The main menu is displayed. panel is not closed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the ▷ Move the controller to the right.
main menu.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.

20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
iDrive At a glance

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
cate that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.

Display of an opened menu


When selecting a menu, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu.
To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
3. Press the controller.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.

Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is Selecting functions
displayed. 1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
Options menu
3. Select the desired function.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
This area remains unchanged.
tive map.
▷ Control options for the selected main
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
letters and numbers.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Entering letters and numbers


Changing settings
Entering letters requires some practice at the
1. Select a field.
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:

21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance iDrive

▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Example: setting the clock
and numbers, it may be necessary to reel
via the controller to the corresponding In‐ Setting the clock
put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the
On the Control Display:
spelling of upper and lower case letters is
identical.
1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
played.
the Control Display.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
lighted, and then press the controller.
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
upper area of the touchpad.
to display "Time/Date".
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
in the lower area of the touchpad.
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls

Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐


Internet sites. spective direc‐
tion.

Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on


5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
map or Internet sites. the touchpad with
lighted, and then press the controller.
fingers.

Display the menu or open Tap once.


a link in the Internet.

Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.

22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
iDrive At a glance

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning


press the controller.
Text message was received.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.


Status information SIM card is missing.

Status field Enter PIN.


The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols
▷ Time.
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player.
▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection.
▷ Phone status.
Gracenote® database.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
AUX-IN port.
Status field symbols USB audio interface.
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Radio symbols
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols
Split screen
Symbol Meaning
General information
Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the
Missed call. right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
Wireless network reception In the divided screen view, the so-called split
strength. screen, this information remains visible even
Symbol flashes: network search. when you change to another menu.
Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance iDrive

Switching the split screen on and off Without navigation system and
On the Control Display: telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
1. Press button. tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.
2. "Split screen"
Saving a function
Selecting the display
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
On the Control Display:
2. Press and hold the desired button,
1. Press button. until a signal sounds.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is Running a function
selected. Press button.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen The function will work immediately.
content". This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
5. Select the desired menu item. when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment


Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.

Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Deleting the button assignments
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
approx. five seconds.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
2. "OK"
use.

24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
iDrive At a glance

Deleting personal in the Entering letters and numbers


vehicle
General information
The concept On the Control Display:
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
personal data, such as stored radio stations. bers.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
leted through iDrive.
needed.
General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function

▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐


▷ Stored radio stations. ter or number.

▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended


▷ Travel and computer information. period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
▷ Phone book.
Depending on the menu, you can reel between
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. entering upper and lower case, letters and
▷ Voice notes. numbers:
▷ Login accounts. Symbol Function
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Enter the letters.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.

or Tip controller up.


Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Without navigation system
Deleting data Select the symbol.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display. Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
1. Switch on the ignition.
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
2. "Settings" ters may be added automatically.
3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data
4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle.
5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
6. "OK"

25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance iDrive

▷ Target search: names of locations may be


entered in languages available through
Control Display.

26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Voice activation system At a glance

Voice activation system


Vehicle features and options Using voice activation
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Activating the voice activation system
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
1. Press button on the steering
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
wheel.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal.
systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command.
provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice
respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
The concept cates that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐
Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive.
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation
during input. system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Possible commands
Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can
system. be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
Requirements play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions.
also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
fied. actly as they show in the respective list.
Set the language, refer to page 90.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.

27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance Voice activation system

Executing functions using short


commands 2. Press button on the steering
wheel.
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which 3. ›Tone‹
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Setting the voice dialog
munication Owner's Manual. Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
Help dialog for the voice activation The short version of the voice dialog plays
system back short messages in abbreviated form.
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
1. "Settings"
Additional commands for the help dialog:
2. "Language/Units"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options 3. "Speech type:"
and the most important commands for 4. Select setting.
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.

One example: open the tone


settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
needed. struction until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
2. Press button on the steering volume of other audio sources is changed.
wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
3. ›Radio‹ rently in use.
4. ›Tone‹

Via short command Hints on Emergency


The desired tone settings can also be started Requests
via a short command. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
needed. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Voice activation system At a glance

This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐


ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 223, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle


Vehicle features and options Select components

This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button.


specific and optional features offered with the
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller.
the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range:
also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference"
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures"
respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"

Integrated Owner's Manual


in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.

Components of the Integrated


Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
Turn the controller until the next or previous
mation or possible access.
page is displayed.
Quick Reference Guide
Page by page without link access
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
ping the links.
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward.
ogy for a feature is not at hand.

Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.

30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons


temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via the iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1. Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more
menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the


Owner's Manual
To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:

1. Press button or move the controller


to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.

4. Press button again to return to last


displayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page of


the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.

31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing


Vehicle features and options Overview

This chapter describes all standard, country-


specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Remote control/key 3 Opening the trunk lid

General information 4 Panic mode


The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key. Integrated key
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 43.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
mote control, refer to page 210 row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.

The storage compartment contains a switch


for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 41.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐
tains a switch for separately securing the trunk
lid, refer to page 41.

34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

Replacing the battery ▷ Interference of radio transmission by


charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.

Starting the engine with emergency


detection of the remote control

1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐


trol.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed. Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding
Take the used battery to a recycling Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
center or to your service center. mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
New remote controls pressing the brake.
New remote controls are available from the Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
service center. Control message appears, hold the remote
control, as shown, against the marked area on
Loss of the remote controls the steering column and press the Start/Stop
Lost remote controls can be disabled by your button within 10 seconds while pressing the
service center. clutch pedal.
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
Emergency detection of remote change the height position of the remote con‐
control trol and repeat the procedure.
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ Personal Profile
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts. The concept
▷ Empty battery in remote control. Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
▷ Interference from radio transmissions which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
through mobile devices in close proximity Every remote control has one of these profiles
to remote control. assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐

35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ Profile management
tomatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control, Opening profiles
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ ferent profile may be activated.
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
1. "Settings"
meantime by a person with a different remote
control. 2. "Profiles"
Changes to the settings are automatically 3. Select a profile.
saved in the personal profile. ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can are automatically applied.
be created. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
Adjusting ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
The settings for the following systems and ent remote control, this profile will apply to
functions are saved in the active profile. The both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
scope of storable settings is country- and tiated anymore between the settings for
equipment-dependable. the two remote controls.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
▷ Climate control.
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
▷ Radio.
1. "Settings"
▷ Instrument cluster.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
3. "Options"
▷ Volumes, tone.
4. "Rename current profile"
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation. Resetting profiles
▷ Park Distance Control PDC. The settings of the active profile are reset to
▷ Rearview camera their default values.
▷ Side View. 1. "Settings"
▷ Head-up Display. 2. "Profiles"
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 3. "Options"
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ 4. "Reset current profile"
tion, steering wheel position.
▷ Cruise control. Exporting profiles
▷ Intelligent Safety. Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐

36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ Display profile list during start
file function. The profile list can be displayed during each
The following export options are available: start to select the desired profile.
▷ Via BMW Online. 1. "Settings"
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 2. "Profiles"
Popular file systems for USB devices are 3. "Options"
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
4. "Display user list at startup"
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
1. "Settings"
Using the remote control
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile" Note
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Take the remote control with you
USB interface: "USB device" People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
Importing profiles side. Always take the remote control with you
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
imported via BMW Online. can then be opened from the outside.◀
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface. Unlocking
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ Press button on the remote control.
ported profile.
1. "Settings" ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being unlocked.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐
3. "Import profile" vated. This function is not available, if the
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" interior lamps were switched off manually.
USB interface: "USB device" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
Using the guest profile ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
The guest profile is for individual settings that closing are folded open.
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
files. For Settings, refer to page 43.
This can be useful for drivers who are using The alarm system, refer to page 44, is dis‐
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their armed.
own profile.
1. "Settings" Convenient opening
2. "Profiles" Press and hold this button on the re‐
3. "Guest" mote control after unlocking.

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not


assigned to the current remote control.

37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

The windows and the glass sunroof are The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the
opened, as long as the button on the remote vehicle was previously locked or unlocked.
control is pressed. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
Locking before opening.
Locking from the outside Depending on the features and the country
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside version, it is also possible to have door un‐
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43.
not be unlocked from inside without special If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is
knowledge.◀ locked again as soon as it closes.
The driver's door must be closed. Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Press button on the remote control.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
being locked.
the trunk lid is closed.◀
The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed.

Switching on interior lights and Malfunction


courtesy lights Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
Press button on the remote control with
lowing circumstances:
the vehicle locked.
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
This function is not available, if the interior charged. Replace the battery, refer to
lamps were switched off manually. page 35.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ transmission towers or other equipment
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti- with high transmit power.
theft warning system, refer to page 45, are ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ metal objects.
fore pressing the button again.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
Panic mode
in direct proximity.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
Do not transport the remote control together
yourself in a dangerous situation.
with metal objects or electronic devices.
Press button on the remote control for In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
at least 3 seconds. be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.
To reel off the alarm: press any button.

Opening the trunk lid For US owners only


The transmitter and receiver units comply with
Press button on the remote control for
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
approx. 1 second.

38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐


erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
Compliance statement: lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC The other doors must be unlocked or locked
Rules. Operation is subject to the following from the inside.
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ Alarm system
ference, and
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
▷ this device must accept any interference locked with the integrated key.
received, including interference that may
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
cause undesired operation.
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to door lock.
these devices could void the user's authority to
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
operate this equipment.
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35.
Without remote control
From the inside
From the outside
Locking from the outside Unlocking and locking
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐
not be unlocked from inside without special
knowledge.◀

Remove the key before pulling the door


handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and
the key.◀
Pressing the central locking system button
locks or unlocks the vehicle with the front
doors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when


locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning trol for approx. 1 second.
system and interior lights come on. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Unlocking with the remote control,
Unlocking and opening refer to page 38.
The trunk lid opens.

Opening from the inside


With the vehicle is stationary, press
the button in the driver's footwell.

The trunk lid opens.

Closing
▷ Press the central locking system button to
unlock the doors together, and then pull Hints
the door handle above the armrest. Keep the closing path clear
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door Make sure that the closing path of the
handle twice: the first time unlocks the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
door, the second time opens it. The other sult.◀
doors remain locked.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Trunk lid Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
Opening mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and the trunk lid is closed.◀
up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available Closing
before opening.

Opening from the outside

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk


lid make it easier to pull down the lid.

▷ Press button on the trunk lid.

40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

Locking separately Comfort Access supports the following func‐


The trunk lid can be locked separately with the tions:
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be ▷ Convenient closing.
opened.
▷ Open the trunk lid individually.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ ▷ Start the engine.
row 2.
Functional requirements
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from ence nearby.
the central locking system. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked must be located outside of the vehicle.
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
trol can be handed out without the key. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
Emergency unlocking mote control is in the vehicle.

Unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area.


The trunk lid unlocks.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
Comfort Access
the remote control.
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.

41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

Locking In addition to locking, the windows and the


glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.

Separately unlocking the trunk lid


Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the re‐
mote control button.
The situation of the doors does not change.
Do not place the remote control in the
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
cargo area
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ Take the remote control with you and do not
ing the door handle. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the trunk lid is closed.◀
the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
Opening trunk lid with no-touch
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
activation
sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐
cle. The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch ac‐
tivation using the remote control you are carry‐
ing. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
Convenient closing foot motion in the center of the area at the rear
Monitor closing of the car and the trunk lid opens.
Monitor closing to ensure that no one
becomes trapped.◀
Foot movement to be carried out
Do not touch vehicle
With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
hot exhaust system parts.◀

1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,


about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
Touch the surface on the door handle of the ately pull it back. With this movement, the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding
the remote control button.

42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

leg must pass through the ranges of both ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
sensors. metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.

Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier. Adjusting
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes. Unlocking
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
was previously locked or unlocked. fer to page 35.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
Doors
before opening. 1. "Settings"

Preventing inadvertent opening 2. "Doors/key"

In situations where the trunk lid is not to 3. Select the symbol.


be opened with no-touch activation, ensure 4. Select the desired function:
that the remote control is located beyond the ▷ "Driver's door only"
range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
the rear of the car.
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ locks the entire vehicle.
vertently, for example by an unintentional or
▷ "All doors"
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀
The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Malfunction
Trunk lid
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
Depending on optional features and country
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
version, this setting is not offered in some
lowing circumstances:
cases.
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to 1. "Settings"
page 35. 2. "Doors/key"
▷ Interference of the radio connection from 3. Select the symbol.
transmission towers or other equipment 4. Select the desired function:
with high transmit power.
▷ "Tailgate"
The trunk lid is opened.

43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" objects damaged when the seat is moved


The trunk lid is opened and the doors back.◀
are unlocked. The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
ory is pressed.
fer to page 35.
1. "Settings" Activating the setting
2. "Doors/key" 1. "Settings"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ 2. "Doors/key"
mation signals. 3. "Last seat position autom."
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Alarm system
Automatic locking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ The concept
fer to page 35. When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
1. "Settings"
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
2. "Doors/key"
▷ Movements in the interior.
3. Select the desired function:
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
▷ "Lock if no door is opened" tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
The vehicle locks automatically after a the car.
short period of time if no door is ▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
opened.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ "Lock after start driving"
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
The vehicle locks automatically after
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
you drive off.
tem.
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ Arming and disarming the alarm
rently in use. system
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
are automatically retrieved if this function was
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at
activated.
the same time.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure Door lock and armed alarm system
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is The alarm system is triggered when the door is
empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.

44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

Trunk lid and armed alarm system ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
The trunk lid can be opened even when the until the engine ignition is switched on, but
alarm system is armed. no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and An alarm has been triggered.
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once. Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Panic mode
The alarm system responds in situations such
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
yourself in a dangerous situation.
towed.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds. Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
closed for the system to function properly.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
Avoiding unintentional alarms
mirror
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
2 seconds: interior motion sensor
The system is armed. Press the remote control button again
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed is locked.
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
cured. onds and then continues to flash.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. again.
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will Switching off the alarm
be switched on.
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ switch on the ignition, if needed through
ing: emergency detection of remote control, re‐
The vehicle has not been tampered with. fer to page 35.

45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying


the remote control on your person, grasp ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
the driver side or front passenger side door point.
handle completely. The window closes while the switch is
held.

Power windows ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance


point.
Hint The window closes automatically. Pulling
Take the remote control with you again stops the motion.
Take the remote control with you when See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ refer to page 41.
not operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀ Pinch protection system
Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the win‐
dow's range of movement; otherwise, the
Opening pinch protection system will be impaired.◀

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a


▷ Press the button to the resistance window closes, closing is interrupted.
point.
The window reopens slightly.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Closing without the pinch protection
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ system
ance point.
Keep the closing path clear
The window opens automatically. Pressing
Monitor closing and make sure that the
the switch again stopse the motion.
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
See also: Convenient opening, refer to injuries may result.◀
page 37, via remote control.
E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐
Closing vent window from closing properly - proceed
as follows:
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the 1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, hold it there.
injuries may result.◀

46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

The pinch protection is limited and the Extending or retracting roller sunblind
window reopens slightly if the closing force for rear window
exceeds a certain margin.
Press button.
2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again
within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection. Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Safety switch Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
General information
Do not open the window while the roller
The safety switch in the driver's door can be sunblind is tilted
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐
and closing the rear windows using the
blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam‐
switches in the rear.
age at high speeds that may result in personal
injury.◀
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐ Glass sunroof, powered
tion is switched on.
General information
Safety switch for rear operation
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
Press the safety switch when transport‐ tion is switched on.
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐ Keep the closing path clear
vision.◀ Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐
erwise, injuries may result.◀
Roller sunblinds Take the remote control with you

Roller sunblind for rear window Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
General information not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐
selves.◀
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.

47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Opening and closing

Tilting the glass sunroof Pinch protection system


Push switch briefly upward. If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
tilted.
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
▷ The opened glass sunroof the tilted position during closing.
closes until it is in its tilted
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
position. The sliding visor
does not move. Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
tection
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and Despite the pinch protection system, check
sliding visor together that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear;
otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐
▷ Press the reel in the desired rupted in certain extreme situations, such as
direction to the resistance when thin objects are present.◀
point and hold it there.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
Closing from the open position
sor open together as long as
without pinch protection
the reel is held down.
E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as
The glass sunroof closes as follows:
long as the reel is held
down. The sliding visor can 1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐
be manually closed. ance point and hold.
▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past The pinch protection is limited and the
the resistance point. glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open force exceeds a certain margin.
automatically. 2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐
The glass sunroof closes automatically. sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
The sliding visor can be manually closed. roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.

Additional options: Closing from the raised position


without pinch protection
▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via
the remote control. If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐
ward past the resistance point and hold it.
▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer
to page 41. The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Comfort position
Initializing after a power failure
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been After a power failure during the opening or
attained. In this position the wind noises in the closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
interior are the least. operated to a limited extent.

If desired, continue the movement by pressing


the reel.

48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Opening and closing Controls

Initializing the system


The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐
erwise, injuries may result.◀

Press the reel up and hold it until


the initialization is complete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof is completely closed.
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.

49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Adjusting

Adjusting
Vehicle features and options Keep the movement area unobstructed
When changing the seat position, keep
This chapter describes all standard, country-
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
specific and optional features offered with the
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
series. It also describes features that are not
damaged.◀
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Manually adjustable seats
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the At a glance
respective features and systems.

Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53. 1 Forward/backward
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54. 2 Thigh support
▷ Airbags, refer to page 97. 3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
Seats 5 Lumbar support
6 Height
Hints 7 Backrest tilt
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected Forward/backward
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to the


rear
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear
while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under
the safety belt in the event of an accident. This
would eliminate the protection normally pro‐
vided by the belt.◀
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.

50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Adjusting Controls

After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
ward or back slightly making sure it engages engages properly.
properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Height
At a glance

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat


or lift it off, as necessary. 1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
Backrest tilt 3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐
cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐
sition is automatically retrieved if the Function,
refer to page 44, is activated for this purpose.
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Adjustments in detail
1. Forward/back.
Seat tilt

Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired


tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight

51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Adjusting

2. Height. Thigh support

3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.

Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.

Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.

52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Adjusting Controls

Front seat heating If the journey is continued within approx. 15


minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.

Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐ Safety belts
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when Seats with safety belt
three LEDs are lit. The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
If the journey is continued within approx. 15 equipped with a safety belt.
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last. General information
When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐ Always make sure that safety belts are being
vated, the heater output is reduced. worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
Switch off
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Press button longer.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
The LEDs go out. added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Rear seat heating The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.

Hints
One person per safety belt
Switching on
Never allow more than one person to
Press button once for each tempera‐ wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
ture level. small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.

53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Adjusting

Putting on the belt safety belt reminder is active at speeds above


Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the if objects are placed on the front passenger
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies seat.
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt Damage to safety belts
can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
jure the abdomen.
aged otherwise:
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
objects, or be pinched.◀
checked.
What reduces the restraining effect Check and replace safety belts
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull This should only be done by your service
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the center; otherwise, this safety feature might not
tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; work properly.◀
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the
restraining effect is reduced.◀

Front headrests
Buckling the belt
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle. Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly. Distance
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ is as close as possible to the back of the head.
nism. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The

54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Adjusting Controls

Adjusting the height

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐


sistance.
▷ To raise: push.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
straint out completely.
headrest down.
Before transporting passengers

Tilt Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐


porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
Three different tilt positions are available.
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀

Rear head restraints


Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐
straint forward, arrow 1. Adjusting the head restraint
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
restraint folds as far back as possible. seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Height
sitting in the seat in question. Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.

55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Adjusting

Adjusting the height

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐


sistance.
▷ To raise: push.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
straint out completely.
headrest down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted Before transporting passengers
in elevation. Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
Folding down head restraints able.◀
Extending/retracting head restraint
Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐
sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted Seat and mirror memory
headrests again if passengers are being car‐
ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased Hints
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat could result in an accident.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructed


When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
damaged.◀
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2. The concept
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints. Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
Removing
lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.

56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Adjusting Controls

At a glance Calling up of a seat position


deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

Storing Mirrors
1. Switch on the ignition.
Exterior mirrors
2. Set the desired position.
General information
3. Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up. The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently in
If the SET button is pressed accidentally: use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
Press button again. mote control, the position is automatically re‐
The LED goes out. trieved if this function is active.

Note
Calling up settings
Estimating distances correctly
Comfort function Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
1. Open the driver's door. than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
2. Switch off the ignition. see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. of an accident.◀
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting
the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐
tion.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.

57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Adjusting

At a glance 2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.

Fold in and out


Press button.

Possible at speeds up to approx.


1 Adjusting  58 15 mph/20 km/h.
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor E. g. this is advantageous
3 Fold in and out  58 ▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
Selecting a mirror ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
To change over to the other mirror: folded away manually.
Slide the switch. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Adjusting electrically
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
Before washing the car in an automatic
tion in which the button is pressed.
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
Saving positions be damaged, depending on the width of the
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 56. vehicle.◀

Adjusting manually Automatic heating


In case of electrical malfunction press edges of Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
mirror. whenever the engine is running.

Automatic Curb Monitor Automatic dimming feature


Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
The concept med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on rearview mirror, refer to page 59.
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's side


mirror position.

58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Adjusting Controls

Interior rearview mirror, manually Steering wheel


dimmable
Note
Turn knob
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀

Adjusting

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by


the interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic


dimming feature

The concept 1. Fold the lever down.


2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.

Steering wheel heating

Photocells are used for control:


▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement
For proper operation: Press button.
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside ▷ On: the LED lights up.
rearview mirror and the windshield. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.

59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely


Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

The right place for children


Note Note
Children in the vehicle Deactivating the front-seat passenger
Do not leave children unattended in the airbags
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ If a child restraint system is used in the front
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
doors.◀ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
Children should always be in the rear bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Installing child restraint
Only transport children younger than
systems
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint systems provided in
Hints
accordance with the age, weight and size of
the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk Manufacturer's information for child re‐
of injury in an accident. straint systems
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tems, observe the information provided by the
system can no longer be used due to their age, system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐
weight and size.◀ tive effect can be lost.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seat


Children on the front passenger seat
When installing child restraint systems,
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
straint system in the front passenger seat, tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
on the front passenger side are deactivated. justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
ger airbags, refer to page 99. the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because

60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Transporting children safely Controls

of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐
rest.◀ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀

Adjustable backrest width: before installing a


On the front passenger seat child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
Deactivating airbags not change the backrest width again and do
Deactivating the front-seat passenger not call up a memory position.
airbags
If a child restraint system is used in the front
Child seat security
passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀

After installing a child restraint system in the


front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
automatically, refer to page 99.
ten child restraint systems.
Seat position and height The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and adjust its height to the highest and Locking the safety belt
thus best possible position for the belt and to 1. Pull out the strap completely.
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
dent.
belt.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
tight against the child restraint system.
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
The safety belt is locked.
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Unlocking the safety belt
Backrest width 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.

Backrest width for the child seat 2. Remove the child restraint system.

Before installing a child restraint system 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
in the front passenger seat, the backrest width
must be opened completely. Do not change

61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Transporting children safely

LATCH child restraint system


LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ Before installing LATCH child
dren. restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
Note straint system.
Follow manufacturer's information for
LATCH child restraint systems Assembly of LATCH child restraint
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
systems
systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to
formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ the user's manual of the system.
erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
duced.◀ erly connected.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Child restraint fixing system with a
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
tether strap
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
Mounting points
is restrained by the internal harnesses. The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Note Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint Note
system is resting snugly against the backrest; Mounting eyelets
otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐
Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐
duced.◀
per retaining strap to secure child restraint
systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could
Position be damaged.◀
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Retaining strap guide
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
Retaining strap
marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐
bols. Use of inner lower anchors from Make sure the upper retaining strap does
standard outboard LATCH positions to not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
install a child restraint system in the center is it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
not recommended. For the center position, strap will not properly secure the child restraint
use the vehicle seat belt instead. system in the event of an accident.◀

62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Transporting children safely Controls

Locking the doors and


windows
Rear doors

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Rear window shelf Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
6 Seat backrest The door can now be opened from the outside
7 Upper retaining strap only.

Attaching the upper retaining strap to Safety switch for the rear
the mounting point Press button on the driver's door if
1. Remove the mounting point cover. children are being transported in the
rear.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between This locks various functions so that they can‐
the supports of the head restraint. not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to refer to page 47.
the mounting eye.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

Driving
Vehicle features and options Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
This chapter describes all standard, country-
button again without stepping on the brake.
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
the selected options or country versions. This All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
also applies to safety-related functions and out.
systems. The respectively applicable country To save battery power when the engine is off,
provisions must be observed when using the switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
respective features and systems. electronic systems/power consumers.
P when the ignition is switched off
Start/Stop button P is engaged automatically when the ig‐
nition is switched off. When in an automatic car
The concept wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not
switched off accidentally.◀
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off The ignition automatically cuts off while the
and starts the engine. vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
Steptronic transmission: The ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
engine starts if the brakes are low beams are activated.
stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
ton. completely, so that the engine can still be
Manual transmission: The engine starts with started. This function is only available
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop when the low beams are turned off.
button is pressed. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
Ignition on the low beams are turned off.
Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
button without stepping on the brake. with driver's door open and low beams off.
Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ The low beams switch to parking lights after
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. approx. 15 minutes of no use.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Radio ready state
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
Activate radio-ready state:
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time. ▷ When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary Some electronic systems/power consumers
electronic systems/power consumers. remain ready for operation.

64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving Controls

The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ Repeated starting in quick succession
cally: Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐
▷ After approx. 8 minutes. edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,
tral locking system. posing a risk of overheating and damage to the
catalytic converter.◀
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
started. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., moderate engine speeds.
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons: Diesel engine
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐
low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐
▷ When automatically switching from low heating.
beams to parking lights.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically Steptronic transmission
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, Starting the engine
the daytime running lights are activated.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Starting the engine The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
Hints gine starts.

Enclosed areas
Manual transmission
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may Starting the engine
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
1. Depress the brake pedal.
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
Unattended vehicle 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with The ignition is activated automatically for a
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
danger. gine starts.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐
vent the vehicle from moving.◀

65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

Engine stop Auto Start/Stop function


Hints The concept
Take the remote control with you The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
Take the remote control with you when
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
not start the engine.◀
engine starts again automatically for driving
Apply parking brake and further secure off.
the vehicle if needed.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
Automatic mode
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward After every start of the engine using the Start/
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the the last selected state, refer to page 68.
direction of the curb.◀ When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it
is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ Engine stop
serve instructions for going into an automatic
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
car wash, refer to page 229.
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Steptronic transmission Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
Switching off the engine tion D.
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle stopped. vehicle is stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
The engine is switched off. driver's door is closed.
The radio-ready state is switched on. Manual transmission:
3. Set the parking brake. ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
Manual transmission ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Switching off the engine The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the when the engine is switched off.
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. Displays in the instrument cluster
3. Set the parking brake. The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.

66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving Controls

The display indicates that the Safety mode


conditions for an automatic en‐ After the engine switches off automatically, it
gine stop have not been met. will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
Functional limitations
▷ The hood was unlocked.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations: Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
▷ External temperature too low.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
Stop button.
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated Functional limitations
or cooled to the required level.
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
ature. lowing situations:
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
steering wheel is being turned. when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
matic climate control is switched on. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ Stop-and-go traffic. matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
R. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
Starting the engine cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ number of times in succession.
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

Activating/deactivating the system Malfunction


manually The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Using the button Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
Press button. parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is models
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop. Releasing
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an


automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function Hints
is deactivated.
Use while driving
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically. On rare occasions if it is necessary to use
the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐
2. Set the parking brake.
cessive force when applying it. When using it,
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. keep the button on the lever depressed.
Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
Automatic deactivation ing the parking brake may cause the rear
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons
as if the driver were absent. To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.

68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving Controls

The brake lights will not light up if the parking Settings are stored for the profile currently in
brake is set. use.

Signaling briefly
Turn signal, high beams, Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
headlight flasher it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Hints
Do not adjust the exterior mirrors
Do not adjust the exterior mirror while
driving and when turn signals/hazard warning
flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐
nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐
tion and can't be seen.◀

Using turn signals


▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. Hints


To switch off manually, press the lever to the Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐
resistance point. shield
Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀
Triple turn signal activation Do not activate wipers on dry windshield
Press the lever to the resistance point. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
The turn signal flashes three times. dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
The function can be activated or deactivated. cause them to become worn more quickly.◀

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"

69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

Do not activate wipers with wipers folded ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
away once.
Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be
damaged.◀ Interval mode or rain sensor

Switching on The concept


The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.

Activating/deactivating

Push wiper lever up.


The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press Press button on the wiper lever.
once beyond the resistance point. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
hicle comes to standstill. When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
Switch off and brief wipe
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐
intentional wiping can cause damages.◀

Push wiper lever down.


The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.

70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving Controls

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Fold-out position of the wipers


the rain sensor Fold wipers back when you want to change the
blades or with pending low temperatures.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Turn the thumbwheel. After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.

Clean the windshield, headlights Folding wipers back down


Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are activated.◀

1. Switch on the ignition.


2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.

Pull the wiper lever towards you.


The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Washer fluid
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Hints
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ Antifreeze for washer fluid
vated. Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injury if it is used incorrectly.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures Therefore, keep it away from possible sources
of ignition.
Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze
onto the windshield which might impede your Only keep it in the closed original container
viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. and inaccessible to children.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
empty; operation might damage pump.◀ tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
Windshield washer nozzles regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐

71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ Manual transmission


centrate or the equivalent.◀
Shifting
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
cool, and then close the cover completely to When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
avoid contact between the washer fluid and the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐
hot engine parts. vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to to engine damage.◀
personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
Reverse gear
Washer fluid reservoir Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the selector
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐
verse gear.

Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions

D Drive
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir. Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
automatically.
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
R is Reverse
turer's recommendations.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
right mixture.
N Neutral:
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
washes, e.g.
water; this could damage the wiper system.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
page 64, selector lever position P is engaged
ferent manufacturers because they can clog
automatically.
the windshield washer nozzles.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: P Park
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 64, or when the ignition is switched

72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving Controls

off, refer to page 64, and when selector Engaging D, R and N


lever position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐
tion N is set.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D or
R is set.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
hicle may begin to move. rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
Kickdown its center position.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.

Engaging selector lever positions


Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
Press unlock button, in order to:
pedal until you are ready to start.◀
▷ Engage R.
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
▷ Shift out of P.
lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the Engaging P
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.

Press button P.

73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

Sport program and manual mode Steptronic Sport transmission:


prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
Activating the sport program manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ With the respective transmission version, the
tor lever position D. lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
vated.
duced via the shift paddles when switching
briefly from D to manual mode.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of Ending the sport program/manual
selector lever position D. mode
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it Push the selector lever to the right.
backward. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed. Shift paddles
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.

Switching to manual mode


▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
wards.
hands on the steering wheel.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ ▷ With the respective transmission version,
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ the lowest possible gear can be selected
lected gear. by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.

74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving Controls

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine Engaging selector lever position N
and road speeds, for example downshifting is 1. Depress the brake pedal.
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ must audibly start.
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are tion N.
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
A corresponding Check Control message
transmission temporarily switches to manual
is displayed.
mode.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐
If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
tion N within approx. 6 seconds.
sition D with the respective transmission ver‐
sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐ Position N is displayed in the instrument
matic mode: cluster.
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
Or
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
and secure it against moving on its own.
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving Steptronic Sport transmission:
for a certain amount of time or if there has Launch Control
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift
paddles within a certain amount of time, the The concept
transmission switches back to automatic
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
mode.
on surfaces with good traction.

Displays in the instrument cluster Hints


The selector lever position is dis‐ Component wear
played, e.g.: P. Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 166, period.
General information To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to again as soon as possible.
maneuver vehicle from the danger area. An experienced driver may be able to achieve
Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
the engine.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.

75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving

To start with Launch Control do not steer the


steering wheel.

Start with launch control


While the engine is running:

1. Press button or select Sport+ with


the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.

76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

Displays
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge  81 5 Engine oil temperature  81


2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 7 Electronic displays  77
4 Tachometer  81 8 Reset miles  82

Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 86. ▷ Date, refer to page 82.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 82. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 83.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 66. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 75.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 86. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 82.

77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to Red lights


page 78.
▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to Safety belt reminder
page 83. Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for the driver or passenger side is not
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ buckled. The safety belt reminder can
cation. also be activated if objects are placed on the
▷ Range, refer to page 82. front passenger seat.

▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
page 121. correctly.

▷ Service requirements, refer to page 83.


Airbag system
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 85.
▷ Time, refer to page 82. Airbag system and belt tensioner are
defective.
Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
Check Control ice center immediately.

The concept Parking brake, brake system


The Check Control system monitors functions
For additional information, refer to Re‐
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
lease parking brake, refer to page 68.
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display. Front-end collision warning
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
play.
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Indicator/warning lights
Increase distance.
General information Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ another vehicle at a relatively high differential
nations and colors. speed.
Several of the lights are checked for proper Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
functioning and light up temporarily when the neuver.
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.

78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

If a collision with a person detected in this way For additional information, refer to Dynamic
is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal Stability Control DSC, refer to page 119.
sounds.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
Orange lights deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
Active Cruise Control
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
The number bars shows the selected
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
distance from the vehicle driving
trol DTC is switched on.
ahead.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
For additional information, refer to Active
Stability Control, refer to page 119, and Dy‐
Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC,
namic Traction Control, refer to page 120.
refer to page 124.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM


Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
tected.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
quate for operating the system.
neuvers.
The system was deactivated but applies the
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
brakes until you actively resume control by
fer to page 104.
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Yellow lights Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor


signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
Anti-lock Braking System ABS in a tire.

Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
ing force boost in some cases defec‐ sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
tive. Stop carefully. Take into account Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
longer brake travel. Have this checked flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
by the service center immediately. detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
DSC Dynamic Stability Control with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and automatically becomes active again.
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
profile to the driving circumstances. the reset of the system again.

Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
checked by the service center. have the service center check it if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.

79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ Front fog lights
tor, refer to page 100.
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Steering system Front fog lights, refer to page 95.
Steering system in some cases defec‐
tive. High-beam Assistant
Have the steering system checked by
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
the service center.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
Engine functions uation.
Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ For additional information, refer to High-beam
ice center. Assistant, refer to page 94.
For additional information, refer to On-
board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 211. Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
Lane departure warning the speed that was set using the con‐
System is switched on and under cer‐ trol elements on the steering wheel.
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand. Blue lights
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 114. High beams
High beams are activated.
Green lights For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 69.
Turn signal
Turn signal on. General lamps
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb Check Control
has failed.
At least one Check Control message is
For additional information, refer to Turn signal, displayed or is stored. The symbol is
refer to page 69. shown in the display of the instrument
cluster.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ Text messages
vated. Text messages in combination with a symbol
For additional information, refer to in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator
fer to page 92. and warning lights.

80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

Supplementary text messages They are stored and can be displayed


Additional information, such as on the cause of again later.
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control. Displaying stored Check Control
messages
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display. On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
Symbols
2. "Vehicle status"
Depending on the Check Control message, the
3. "Check Control"
following functions can be selected.
4. Select the text message.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the Messages after trip completion
Check Control message in the Integrated
Special messages displayed while driving are
Owner's Manual.
displayed again after the ignition is switched
▷ "Service request" off.
Contact your service center.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance. Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
Hiding Check Control messages the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.

Tachometer
Press the onboard computer button on the Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
turn signal lever. field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
Engine oil temperature
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively. ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
These messages can be faded for approx. the low temperature end.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ Drive at moderate engine
played again automatically. and vehicle speeds.

▷ Other Check Control messages are faded ▷ Normal operating tempera‐


automatically after approx. 20 seconds. ture: the pointer is in the

81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

middle or in the left half of Ice on roads


the temperature display. Even at temperatures above
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of +37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.
the temperature range. A Check Control Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
message is also displayed. shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk
of an accident.◀

Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
Time
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. The time is displayed at the bot‐
Check the coolant level, refer to page 209. tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 89.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display Date
▷ Odometer, arrow 1. The date is displayed in the
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 89.

Show/reset kilometers
Range
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is Display
switched off, the time, the With a low remaining range:
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed. ▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset. ▷ The remaining range is
shown on the on-board co‐
mupter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking
External temperature curves aggressively - engine operation
If the indicator drops to might vary.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
The Check Control message appears continu‐
sounds.
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
A Check Control message is
displayed. Refuel promptly

There is an increased risk of ice on roads. Refuel no later than at a range of


30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀

82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

Displaying the cruising range Energy recovery


Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the range can also be displayed as bar in the Display
instrument cluster.
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
1. "Settings" is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
2. "Instrument cluster"
tery is partially charged and fuel
3. "Additional indicators" consumption can be reduced.

Current fuel consumption


Service requirements
Instrument cluster
The concept
Displays the current fuel con‐
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
sumption. Check whether you
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
are currently driving in an effi‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
cient and environmentally-
nance.
friendly manner.
Your service specialist can read the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
Instrum. cluster with enhanced trol.
features
Displays the current fuel con‐ Display
sumption. Check whether you Data regarding the service status or legally
are currently driving in an effi‐ mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cient and environmentally- cally transmitted to your service center before
friendly manner. a service due date.

Displaying the current fuel Detailed information on service


consumption requirements
1. "Settings" More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
2. "Instrument cluster"
play.
3. "Additional indicators"
On the Control Display:
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.

83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

Symbols Gear shift indicator


Sym‐ Description The concept
bols
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
No service is currently required. cient gear for the current driving situation.
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tronic transmission and with manual
tion is approaching. transmission.
The service deadline has already Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
passed. played in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying


Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections. Symbol Description
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Fuel efficient gear is set.
set correctly.
On the Control Display:
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required" Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

4. "§ Vehicle inspection"


5. "Date:" Shift into neutral.
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored. Steptronic transmission: displays

Automatic Service Request Example Description


Data regarding the service status or legally
Fuel efficient gear is set.
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before
a service due date.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"

84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

Speed limit detection Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
The concept
Switching on/off
Speed limit detection
On the Control Display:
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently 1. "Settings"
detected speed limit. The camera in the area of 2. "Instrument cluster"
the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs 3. "Speed limit information"
at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐
ment cluster via the computer.
tected and compared with the vehicle's
onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and
will be displayed depending on the situation. Display
The system takes into account the information The following is displayed in the instrument
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐ cluster:
plays speed limits present on routes without
signs. Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation. Speed limit detection is not
The system assists the driver and does not re‐ available.
place the human eye.◀

At a glance
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
Camera the Head-up Display.

System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
The camera is found near the interior rearview ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
mirror.

85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

▷ When the windshield behind the interior Display


rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing. Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
the illustration shown.
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
Activating a list and adjusting the
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
setting
ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in the


instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
list.
▷ Current audio source.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
▷ Redial phone feature. ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control. On-board computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the com‐
puter is shown in the info display
in the instrument cluster.

86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

Calling up information on the info On the Control Display:


display
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
Press the onboard computer button on the It is calculated based on your driving style over
turn signal lever. the last 20 miles/30 km.
Information is displayed in the info display of If there is only enough fuel left for less than
the instrument cluster. 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
changes.

Information at a glance Average fuel consumption


Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn The average fuel consumption is calculated for
signal lever calls up the following information in the period while the engine is running.
the info display:
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Range. the distance traveled since the last reset by the
▷ Average consumption, fuel. on-board comupter.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
▷ Date.
engine manually stopped are not included in
▷ Speed limit detection. the calculation of the average speed.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in Resetting average values
the navigation system. Press and hold the onboard computer button
▷ Distance to destination. on the turn signal lever.

When destination guidance is activated in


Distance to destination
the navigation system.
The distance remaining to the destination is
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
Adjusting the info display
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
tomatically.
you can select what information from the com‐
puter is to be displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.

87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

Time of arrival 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"


The estimated time of arrival is 4. "Yes"
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started. Sport displays
The time must be correctly set.
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
Speed limit detection
performance and torque can be displayed if
Description of the speed limit detection, refer the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
to page 85, function.
Displaying sport displays on the
Trip computer Control Display
The vehicle features two types of board com‐ 1. "Vehicle info"
puters.
2. "Sport displays"
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an Speed warning
overview of the current trip.
The concept
Resetting the trip computer Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
On the Control Display: a warning to be issued.
1. "Vehicle info" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
2. "Trip computer"
3 mph/5 km/h.
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset Displaying, setting or changing the
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a speed warning
standstill. On the Control Display:

Display on the Control Display 1. "Settings"


Display the computer or trip computer on the 2. "Speed"
Control Display. 3. "Warning at:"
1. "Vehicle info" 4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
5. Press the controller.
Resetting the fuel consumption or Speed warning is stored.
speed
On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"

88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

Activating/deactivating the speed 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
warning nutes are displayed.
On the Control Display: 7. Press the controller.

1. "Settings" The time is stored.

2. "Speed"
Setting the time format
3. "Warning"
1. "Settings"
4. Press the controller.
2. "Time/Date"

Setting your current speed as the 3. "Format:"


speed warning 4. Select the desired format.
On the Control Display: The time format is stored.

1. "Settings"
Automatic time setting
2. "Speed"
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
3. "Select current speed" the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
4. Press the controller. updated automatically.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the 1. "Settings"
speed warning.
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
Settings on the Control
Date
Display
Setting the date
Time
1. "Settings"
Setting the time zone 2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings" 3. "Date:"
2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
3. "Time zone:" displayed.

4. Select the desired time zone. 5. Press the controller.

The time zone is stored. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
Setting the time The date is stored.
1. "Settings"
Setting the date format
2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings"
3. "Time:"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed. 3. "Format:"

5. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired format.


The date format is stored.

89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Displays

Language Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐


ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display: Assist system information

1. "Settings" Display on the Control Display


2. "Language/Units" Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
3. "Language:" played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
4. Select the desired language. play.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in 1. "Settings"


use. 2. "Control display"
3. "Driver assistance info"
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28. Head-up Display
Units of measure The concept
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:

1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in This system projects important information
use. into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
Brightness
his or her eyes from the road.
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display: Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
1. "Settings"
Display is influenced by the following factors:
2. "Control display"
▷ Certain sitting positions.
3. "Brightness"
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ play.
ness is set.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
5. Press the controller.
▷ Wet roads.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
use.

90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Displays Controls

If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
tings. ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Switching on/off Settings are stored for the profile currently in
1. "Settings" use.
2. "Head-Up Display"
Adjusting the height
3. "Head-Up Display"
On the Control Display:
Display 1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
Overview
3. "Height"
▷ Speed.
4. Turn the controller.
▷ Navigation system.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
▷ Check Control messages.
use.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems. Setting the rotation
Some of this information is only displayed On the Control Display:
briefly as needed.
1. "Settings"
Selecting displays in the Head-up 2. "Head-Up Display"
Display 3. "Rotation"
On the Control Display: 4. Turn the controller.
1. "Settings" Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information" Special windshield
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up The windshield is part of the system.
Display.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
Settings are stored for the profile currently in to display a precise image.
use.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Setting the brightness
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
placed by a service center only.
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.

91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Lights

Lights
Vehicle features and options Parking lights/low beams,
This chapter describes all standard, country- headlight control
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not General information
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Position of switch: , ,
the selected options or country versions. This If the driver door is opened with the ignition
also applies to safety-related functions and switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
systems. The respectively applicable country cally switched off at these switch settings.
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems. Parking lights
Position of switch : the vehicle's lights
light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Overview
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to
page 93.

Low beams
Position of switch with the ignition
1 Rear fog lights switched on: the low beams light up.
2 Front fog lights
3 Depending on the equipment: automatic Welcome lights
headlight control, Adaptive Light Control, When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in
High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights, position or : parking and interior lights
Daytime running lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked
4 Lights off, daytime running lights depending on the ambient brightness.
5 Parking lights, daytime running lights
Activating/deactivating
6 Depending on the equipment: low beams,
On the Control Display:
welcome lights, High-beam Assistant
7 Instrument lighting 1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.

92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Lights Controls

Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating


The low beams stay lit for a short while if the In some countries, daytime running lights are
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio- mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
ready state is switched off. vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
On the Control Display:
2. "Lighting"
1. "Settings"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
2. "Lighting"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
3. "Pathway lighting:" use.
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in Roadside parking lights
use.

Automatic headlight control


Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐
vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in
twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on
The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever
lights are activated. either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlight control cannot Switch off
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
ment in determining when to turn the lights on the opposite direction.
in response to ambient lighting conditions.
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under Adaptive Light Control
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.◀ The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
Daytime running lights control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ tion of the road surface.
ning lights light up in position , or Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
. After the ignition is switched off, the park‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows
ing lights light up in position . the course of the road.

93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Lights

In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐
when turning, one of the two front fog lights is tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀
switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the
inside of the curve is better lighted. Activating

Activating
Position of switch with the ignition
switched on.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals. 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may switch into position or .
be automatically switched on regardless of the 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
steering angle. row.

Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument


cluster lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
failed. Have the system checked as soon as tomatically brightened or dimmed.
possible. The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
High-beam Assistant
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
The concept
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
When the low beams are activated, this system ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
automatically switches the high beams on and the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
off or suppresses the light in the areas that ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
trolled by a camera on the front of the interior the blue indicator light will stay on.
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are activated whenever the traffic
situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams non and
off as usual.

Note
Personal responsibility
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐

94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Lights Controls

Switching the high beams on and off Fog lights


manually
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to


page 93, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. When the high beams or headlight flasher are
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ Instrument lighting
ton on the turn signal lever.
Adjusting
System limits
The parking lights or low beams
The system is not fully functional in situations
must be switched on to adjust
such as the following, and driver intervention
the brightness.
may be necessary:
Adjust the brightness with the
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
thumbwheel.
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or Interior lights
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
General information
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
coming traffic on freeways. and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.

95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Lights

Overview Setting the brightness


The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lights on and off


Press button.

To reel off permanently: press the button for


approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.

Reading lights
Press button.

Reading lights are located at the front and rear


next to the interior lights.

Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.

Selecting color scheme


On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they illuminate in the line's
color when vehicle is unlocked.

96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Safety
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag


2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags
3 Head airbag

Front airbags Side airbags


Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.

97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

Ejection Mitigation ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads


The head airbag system is designed as an away from the side airbag and do not rest
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants might occur when airbag is activated.
through side windows during rollovers or side ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
impact events. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
Knee airbag
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal modify them in any way.
impact.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
Protective action
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end and the sides of the roofliner.◀
collisions.
Even when you follow all instructions very
Information on how to ensure the optimal closely, injury from contact with the airbags
protective effect of the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the short-term and, in most cases, temporary
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐
keep the risk of injury to your hands or ploying the airbags
arms as low as possible when the airbag is
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
triggered.
diately after the system has been triggered;
▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ otherwise, you may risk burns.
jects between an airbag and a person.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
the front passenger side as a storage area. the service center or an authorized repair shop
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front for handling explosives.
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS unintentional activation of the airbag - both
devices or' mobile phones. may lead to injury.◀
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
Warnings and information on the airbags are
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
also found on the sun visors.
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
might occur when front airbag is activated.
Functional readiness of the airbag
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or system
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐
with integrated side airbags. ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.

98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

erational readiness of the entire airbag system In this case, change the sitting position so that
and the belt tensioner. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
Airbag system malfunctioning If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on. To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ or other items to the front passenger seat
tem checked immediately. unless they are specifically recommended
In case of a malfunction have airbag system by your vehicle's manufacturer.
checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
that the system does not function as expected passenger seat if a child restraint system is
in case of a severe accident.◀ to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Automatic deactivation of the front- could press against the seat from below.
seat passenger airbags
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
sistance.
passenger airbags
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
proper functioning of the front passenger air‐
bag might not be assured.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the front


The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
passenger seat
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ front-seat passenger airbags.
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
structions for children on the front passenger
ther activated or deactivated.
seat, see Children.◀
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
Malfunction of the automatic when a child is properly
deactivation system seated in a child restraint fix‐
When transporting older children and adults, ing system or when the seat
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ is empty. The airbags on the
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, front passenger side are not
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger activated.
airbags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient

99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

size is detected on the seat. The airbags Unobstructed area of movement


on the front passenger side are activated. Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
Detected child seats or damage to objects.◀
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
The concept
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
Strength of the driver's and front-seat or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
passenger airbag tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
Hints
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat. Tire damage due to external factors
With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Sudden tire damage caused by external
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
the accuracy of this function over the long- vance.◀
term.
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
Calibrating the front seats fer to page 189.
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display. Functional requirements
1. Press the reel and move the respective The system must have been reset with the
seat all the way forward. correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still
not assured.
moves forward slightly.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
The calibration procedure is completed when wheel change.
the message on the Control Display disap‐
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
pears.
ensure that the system will operate properly.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration. Status display
If the message does not disappear after a re‐ The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
soon as possible. play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"

100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

2. "Vehicle status" On the Control Display and on the vehicle:


3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" 1. "Vehicle info"
The status is displayed. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
Status control display
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the 5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform
Control Display. reset".
6. Drive away.
All wheels green The tires are shown in gray and the status is
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ displayed.
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
the last reset. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
One wheel is yellow completed automatically while driving.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in After a successfully completed Reset, the
the indicated tire. wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
All wheels are yellow active" is displayed.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
several tires. you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Wheels, gray Low tire pressure message


The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
for this may be:
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
▷ Malfunction. tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
Status information
The system therefore issues a warning
The status control display additionally shows based on the tire inflation pressures before
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ the last reset.
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
depending on driving style or weather condi‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
tions. vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
Carry out reset regular tires or run-flat tires.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the Run-flat tires, refer to page 199, are la‐
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or beled with a circular symbol containing the
wheel change. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

Do not continue driving without run-flat 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
tires the next opportunity.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving is shown to be correct, it is possible that
may result in serious accidents.◀ the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control. Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
Actions in the event of a flat tire The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
Normal tires ing style and road conditions.
1. Identify the damaged tire. A vehicle with an average load has a possible
Do this by checking the air pressure in all driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
four tires. A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
tem, refer to page 199, can possibly be braking, a longer braking distance and different
used for this purpose. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
potholes, etc.
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. Then perform the reset. Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
If an identification is not possible, please
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
contact the service center.
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Mobility System.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In Drive moderately and do not exceed a
this case, have the electronics checked at the speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
next opportunity and have them replaced if Your car handles differently when you lose tire
needed. inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐
duced when braking, braking distances are
Run-flat tires longer and the self-steering properties will
change.◀
Maximum speed
Final tire failure
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce
Continued driving with a flat tire speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: not continue driving and contact your service
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ center.◀
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Required tire inflation pressure check ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
message Reset the system again.
A Check Control message is displayed in the ▷ Interference through systems or devices
following situations with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
▷ The system has detected a wheel change, ing the area of the interference, the system
but no reset was done. automatically becomes active again.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
Declaration according to NHTSA/
specifications.
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below System
the level of the last confirmation.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
In this case: should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as flated to the inflation pressure recommended
needed. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
change. vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
System limits
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
The system does not function properly if a re‐ As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
reported though tire inflation pressures are system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
correct. sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
The tire inflation pressure depends on the significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus should stop and check your tires as soon as
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
temperature falls again. These circumstances tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
may cause a warning when temperatures fall tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
very sharply. ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
Malfunction note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
The yellow warning lamp flashes and proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
then lights up continuously. A Check responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
Control message is displayed. No flat even if under-inflation has not reached the
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tected. tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
Display in the following situations: cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
have the service center check it if needed. tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
your service center. minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐

103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ The status is displayed.


function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to Initialization
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. When initializing the once set inflation tire
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of pressures serve as reference values in order to
reasons, including the installation of replace‐ detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle firming the tire inflation pressures.
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
Do not initialize the system when driving with
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
snow chains.
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement On the Control Display:
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 1. "Vehicle info"
to continue to function properly.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
The concept
6. Drive away.
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
The initialization is completed while driving,
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
which can be interrupted at any time.
tween the individual wheels while driving.
The initialization automatically continues when
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
driving resumes.
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire. Indication of a flat tire
The system does not measure the actual infla‐ The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
tion pressure in the tires. Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
Functional requirements inflation pressure.
The system must have been initialized when
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
vers.
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
every tire or wheel change. regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 199, are la‐
Status display beled with a circular symbol containing the
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., Do not continue driving without run-flat
whether or not the FTM is active. tires
On the Control Display: Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
1. "Vehicle info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ Run-flat tires


bility Control is switched on if needed.
Maximum speed
System limits You may continue driving with a damaged tire
Sudden tire damage at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
Continued driving with a flat tire
external circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.◀ If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, vers.
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the following situations: the next opportunity.
▷ When the system has not been initialized. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
surface. have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
▷ When driving with snow chains.
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
Actions in the event of a flat tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
Normal tires A vehicle with an average load has a possible
1. Identify the damaged tire. driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
four tires. ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
tem, refer to page 199, can possibly be
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
used for this purpose.
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires potholes, etc.
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
Because the possible driving distance de‐
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
the system.
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
If an identification is not possible, please ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
contact the service center. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
2. Fix the flat tire where applicable using the
Continued driving with a flat tire
Mobility System, refer to page 199.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

Your car handles differently when you lose tire Be alert


inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ Due to system limitations, warnings may
duced when braking, braking distances are be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
longer and the self-steering properties will improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
change.◀ ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving Tow-starting and towing
can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
could come loose and cause an accident. Do tions of the individual braking systems might
not continue driving and contact your service lead to accidents.◀
center.◀

At a glance

Intelligent Safety Button in the vehicle

The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
Intelligent Safety button
▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to
page 107.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 112. Camera

Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
The camera is found near the interior rearview
Adapting your speed and driving style mirror.
The displays and warnings of the system Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀

106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Switching on/off General information


The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ The system warns at two levels of an imminent
cally active after every departure. danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
Press button: the systems are turned
the current driving situation.
off. The LED goes out.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
35 mph/60 km/h.
LED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display. Detection range

Front-end collision warning


Depending on the equipment, the collision
warning system consists of one of the two sys‐
tems:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 107.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
It responds to objects if they are detected by
function, refer to page 109
the system.

Front-end collision warning Hints


with City Braking function Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
The concept tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an traffic situation.
accident cannot be prevented, the system will Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
help reduce the collision speed. cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed. Adapting your speed and driving style

The automatic braking intervention is done The displays and warnings of the system
with limited force and duration. do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
traffic conditions.◀
controls the system.
The front-end collision warning is available Be alert
even if cruise control has been deactivated. Due to system limitations, warnings may
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
intentionally the collision warning is delayed improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
avoiding false alarm. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀

107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

Tow-starting and towing Switch off


For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Press button: the system is switched
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ off. The LED goes out.
tions of the individual braking systems might
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
lead to accidents.◀
The LED lights up.

At a glance
Setting the warning time
Button in the vehicle The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use.

Warning with braking function


Intelligent Safety button Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
Camera
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐


ing.
Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an


acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
The camera is found near the interior rearview You are requested to intervene by
mirror. braking or make an evasive maneu‐
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ver.
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Prewarning
Switching on/off This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
Switching on automatically to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The system is automatically active after every The driver must intervene actively when there
driving-off. is a prewarning.

108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Acute warning with braking function ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision them at high speed.
when the vehicle approaches another object at ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
a relatively high differential speed. you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The driver must intervene actively when there ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision. Functional limitations
Acute warnings can also be triggered without The system may not be fully functional in the
previous prewarning. following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
Braking intervention
fall.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
▷ In tight curves.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
some braking intervention if there is risk of a version, the field of view of the camera in
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
come to a complete stop. scured.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
be shut down. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
The braking intervention is executed only if ately after vehicle shipment.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
vated. low in the sky.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ Warning sensitivity
tively moving the steering wheel. The more sensitive the warning settings are,
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
of the detection range and functional restric‐ displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
tions are to be considered. cess of false warnings.

System limits
Front-end collision warning
Detection range
with braking function
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The concept
sued late. The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ accident cannot be prevented, the system will
tected: help reduce the collision speed.

109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
ently if needed. dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
The automatic braking intervention is executed
Adapting your speed and driving style
with limited braking force and for a brief period
only. The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision
traffic conditions.◀
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
dar sensor. Be alert
The front-end collision warning is available Due to system limitations, warnings may
even if cruise control has been deactivated. be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
intentionally the collision warning is delayed ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
avoiding false alarm. of an accident.◀

Tow-starting and towing


General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
possible danger of collision with vehicles at Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of tions of the individual braking systems might
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐ lead to accidents.◀
uation.
At a glance
Detection range
Button in the vehicle

It responds to objects if they are detected by


the system. Intelligent Safety button

Hints
Radar sensor
Personal responsibility
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
The system does not serve as a substi‐ for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the vehicle.
traffic situation.

110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Warning with braking function

Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐


A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ ing.
tection of vehicles.
Brake and increase distance.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ The vehicle flashes red and an
move layers of snow and ice carefully. acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar ing.
sensor. You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
Switching on/off ver.

Switching on automatically
Prewarning
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off. This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
Switch off to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
Press button: the system is switched
is a prewarning.
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on. Acute warning with braking function
The LED lights up.
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
Setting the warning time a relatively high differential speed.
The warning time can be set via iDrive. The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
1. "Settings"
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" in a possible risk of collision.
3. Activate the desired time on the Control Acute warnings can also be triggered without
Display. previous prewarning.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use. Braking intervention
The detection of objects can be influenced by
technical system limitations, e. g. pedestrians
or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐
tion range and functional restrictions are to be
considered.

111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ fall.
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ In tight curves.
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
automatic braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ ▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.
cle to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
Warning sensitivity
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may The more sensitive the warning settings are,
be shut down. e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
The braking intervention is executed only if
cess of false warnings.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
Pedestrian warning with city
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. braking function
No automatic delay occurs.
The concept
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐
tively moving the steering wheel. destrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
System limits speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
Detection range function.
The system's detection potential is limited. The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ controls the system.
sued late.
General information
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected: In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐
sions with pedestrians at speeds from about
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h
them at high speed. shortly before a collision the system supports
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you with a braking intervention.
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Under those circumstances it reacts to people
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. who are within the detection range of the sys‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. tem.
▷ Pedestrians.
▷ Stationary objects.

Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:

112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Detection range Tow-starting and towing


For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐


ided into two areas.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within Intelligent Safety button
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Camera
Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
The camera is found near the interior rearview
Adapting your speed and driving style
mirror.
The displays and warnings of the system
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
Switching on/off
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may Switching on automatically
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or The system is automatically active after every
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and driving-off.
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀

113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

Switch off System limits


Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
ited.
LED lights up.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
Warning with braking function
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. because of the viewing angle or contour.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
nal sounds. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver. Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
Braking intervention not be available in the following situations:
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
fall.
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on ▷ In tight curves.
the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
some braking intervention if there is risk of a deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front
come to a complete stop. windshield are dirty or covered.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
be shut down.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
The braking intervention is executed only if ately after vehicle shipment.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
vated.
low in the sky.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
▷ When it is dark outside.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
Lane departure warning
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This

114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

speed, depending on the country version, is Camera


between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the The camera is found near the interior rearview
turn signal is set before leaving the lane. mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
Hints terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute Switching on/off
for the driver's personal judgment of the
Press button.
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
▷ On: the LED lights up.
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
cle.◀ ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
At a glance use.

Button in the vehicle Display in the instrument cluster


▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.

Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
Lane departure warning If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.

115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

▷ When using the turn signal. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
System limits
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
The system may not be fully functional in the
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
following situations:
uations described above.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ and the steering wheel vibrates.
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas. Hints
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, Personal responsibility
ice, dirt or water.
The system does not serve as a substi‐
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
▷ When the lane markings are covered by traffic situation.
objects. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
front of you. dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior At a glance
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc. Button in the vehicle
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.

Active Blind Spot Detection


The concept

Active Blind Spot Detection

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper


monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.

116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Safety Controls

Radar sensors and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing


flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.

System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
The radar sensors are located under the rear much faster than your own.
bumper. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Switching on/off ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
Press button. with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
▷ On: the LED lights up. the system is not fully functional.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
For US owners only
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use. The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Display Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Information stage cause undesired operation.
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the these devices could void the user's authority to
blind spot or approaching from behind. operate this equipment.

Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly

117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Safety

Brake force display After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
The concept alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.

▷ During normal brake application, the outer Break recommendation


brake lights light up. If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
brake lights light up in addition. Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
Attentiveness assistant only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
The concept a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ mately 45 minutes.
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this System limits
situation, it is recommended that the driver The function may be limited in the following
takes a break. situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
Note ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
Personal responsibility ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
The system cannot act as a substitute for about 43 mph/70 km/h.
the personal assessment of one's physical ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
state and may not detect an increasing lack of rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is changing lanes frequently.
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a ▷ When the road surface is poor.
result.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.

Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.

118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving stability control systems Controls

Driving stability control systems


Vehicle features and options DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
This chapter describes all standard, country- the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
specific and optional features offered with the cle on a steady course by reducing engine
series. It also describes features that are not speed and by applying brakes to the individual
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheels.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Note
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Adjust your driving style to the situation
respective features and systems. An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
Antilock Brake System ABS even with DSC.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
braking. margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
The vehicle contains its steering power even Do not deactivate DSC when driving with
during full brake applications, thus increasing roof load
active safety.
Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof-
gine. mounted luggage rack.
Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐
ing-critical situation due to the elevated center
Brake assistant of gravity.◀
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible Overview
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Button in the vehicle
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability


Control
The concept
DSC OFF button
DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.

119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving stability control systems

Indicator/warning lights The system ensures maximum headway on


special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
what limited driving stability.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
failed.
provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
limited during acceleration and when driving in
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF curves.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
in curves. under the following special circumstances:
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
Deactivating DSC
driving off from loose grounds.
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
▷ When driving with snow chains.
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
Traction Control
The DSC system is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
Press button. OFF lights up.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out. Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
Indicator/warning lights TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ tor lamp go out.
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated. xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
DTC Dynamic Traction further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
Control The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
The concept axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
forward momentum is optimized.

120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving stability control systems Controls

Dynamic Damping Control Driving Dynamics Control


The concept The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
eling on uneven road surfaces. ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The system enhances driving dynamics and The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
comfort fitting road surface and driving style. OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
Programs
Overview
The system offers several different programs.
Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Button in the vehicle
Control, refer to page 121.

SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.

SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
Operating the programs
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle. Press button Program

DSC OFF

Variable sport steering TRACTION

The variable sport steering increases the SPORT+


steering angle of the front wheels at large SPORT
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or COMFORT
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
ECO PRO
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
Automatic program change
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during The system may automatically switch to COM‐
parking and maneuvering. FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.

121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving stability control systems

DSC OFF Activating SPORT


When DSC OFF, refer to page 120, is active, Press button repeatedly until SPORT
driving stability is limited during acceleration is displayed in the instrument cluster.
and when driving in curves.

TRACTION Configuring SPORT


When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has When the display is activated on the Control
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Display, refer to page 123, the SPORT driving
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 120, is mode can be set to individual specifications.
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ ▷ Activating SPORT.
celeration and when driving in curves. ▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT+
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
Sporty driving with optimized suspension and
vated:
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization. 1. "Settings"
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. 2. "Driving mode"
The driver handles several of the stabilization 3. "Configure SPORT"
tasks. 4. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
Activating SPORT+
SPORT driving mode is activated.
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and COMFORT
the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program Activating COMFORT
automatically switches to SPORT mode. Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
Indicator/warning lights cluster.
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
Dynamic Traction Control is activated. program change, refer to page 121.

ECO PRO
SPORT
ECO PRO, refer to page 173, provides consis‐
Depending on the equipment, consistently
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
engine control for greater driving agility with
zation.
maximum driving stabilization.
Comfort functions and the engine controller
The program can be configured to individual
are adjusted.
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the profile currently in use.

122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving stability control systems Controls

The program can be configured to individual 3. "Driving mode info"


specifications.

Activating ECO PRO Drive-off assistant


Press button repeatedly until ECO This system supports driving off on inclines.
PRO is displayed in the instrument The parking brake is not required.
cluster.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Configuring ECO PRO
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
1. Activate ECO PRO. out delay.
2. "Configure ECO PRO" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
Make the desired settings. held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
Configuring driving program sions, the possible holding duration amounts
Settings can be made for the following driving to 2 minutes.
programs in Driving mode: Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
▷ SPORT, refer to page 122. is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 174. Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
Displays
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
Program selection
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to
Pressing the button displays a roll back.◀
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
Servotronic
the illustration shown.
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
Selected program quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
The instrument cluster displays the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
the selected program. force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
Display on the Control Display ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
Program changes can be displayed on the sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
Control Display. veyed.

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"

123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐
erates to the desired speed.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
The speed is also maintained downhill, but
specific and optional features offered with the
may not be maintained uphill if engine power is
series. It also describes features that are not
insufficient.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
General information
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country Depending on the driving settings, the features
provisions must be observed when using the of the cruise control can change in certain
respective features and systems. areas.

Hints
Active Cruise Control with Personal responsibility
Stop & Go function, ACC Even an active system holds the driver
responsible for his or her driving, particularly
The concept for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed,
Use this system to select a desired speed that keeping your distance and for your driving
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear style all in relation to traffic.
roads. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
To the extent possible, the system automati‐ independently react to all traffic situations.
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
ahead of you. the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the react when needed, e.g. through braking,
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of
accident.◀
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ Unfavorable weather conditions
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the In the event of unfavorable weather and
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,
cle ahead begins moving faster. slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and recognition of vehicles as well as short-term
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐
given system limits. Your own vehicle will rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when
brake automatically and then accelerate again. necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making
If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the
after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐ risk of an accident.◀
celerator pedal or press the appropriate button
to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐
matically accelerate.

124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it


against moving on its own.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the
Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐
tection of vehicles.
Press but‐ Function
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
ton
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
System on/off, interrupt, refer ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
to page 125 sensor.
Store, maintain speed, refer to
Switching on/off and interrupting
page 126
cruise control
Resume speed, refer to
page 127 Switching on
Reduce distance, refer to Press button on the steering wheel.
page 127
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
Increase distance, refer to
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
page 127
to the current speed.
rocker switch: Cruise control can be used.
Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 126 Switch off
Deactivated or interrupted system
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's With deactivated or interrupted system
series, optional features and country specifica‐ use your brakes, steering and moves as usual
tions. to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

Radar sensor To switch off the system while standing, step


on brake pedal at the same time.
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the Press button.
vehicle.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.

125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Interrupting Maintaining/storing the speed


When active, press the button. Press button.
Or:
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving terrupted.
Dynamics Control.
When the system is switched on, the current
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are speed is maintained and stored as the desired
opened while the vehicle is standing still. speed.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for This is displayed in the speedometer and
an extended period, e.g., on a road with briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the
very little traffic without curb or shoulder instrument cluster, refer to page 127.
markings.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned
rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog. on if needed.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the Changing the speed


speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Hints
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
Adjusting the desired speed vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
Modify desired speed to road conditions road is clear.
and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
there is the risk of an accident.◀ the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
Differences in speed
1 mph/1 km/h.
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
past the point of resistance, the desired
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
ing situations:
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
vehicle.
action.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀

126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Distance To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐


matically, press the accelerator or press
Select a distance
the RES or SET button.
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐
the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed
sor has driven off.
safety distance.◀
Your vehicle was brought down to a halt
through stepping on the brake pedal and it is
Reduce distance
standing behind another vehicle:
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
1. Press button to call up a stored
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ desired speed.
tance, refer to page 127. 2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the
Increase distance RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ of you drives away.
sired distance is set.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 127. Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
Calling up the desired speed and
the system is active.
distance
▷ The marking lights up or‐
While driving ange: the system has been
interrupted.
Press button with the system
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
switched on.
is switched off.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again: Brief status display
▷ When the system is switched off.
Selected desired speed.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standing If --- appears briefly on the display for Check


The system brought the vehicle to a complete Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
standstill: tem requirements are currently not ready for
operations.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as Distance to vehicle ahead of you
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐
dar sensor moves off.
ing ahead of you.
▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐
tomatic driving off.

127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Distance display The conditions are not adequate for the sys‐
tem to work.
Distance 1
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
Distance 2
pedal.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an


Distance 3 acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on. Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
The system has been interrupted or
played in the Head-up Display.
distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
System limits
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Speed range
Distance control is temporarily sup‐ The system is best used on well-constructed
pressed because the accelerator roads.
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle The minimum speed that can be set is
was detected. 20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven can be set depends on the vehicle.
away. The system can also be activated when sta‐
ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate tionary.
further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ uation when using the system.
ton or rocker switch.
Detection range
Indicator/warning lights
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lights do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to
the traffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up orange:


A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you. The detection lidacity of the system and the
automatic braking lidacity are limited.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange: Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.

128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Limited detection potential tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
Because of the limited possible detec‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
tion, you should be alert at all times so that you when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
risk of an accident.◀ the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐
Deceleration wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
Unexpected lane change
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
No warnings into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
A warning may not be issued when ap‐ cle, you yourself must react, as the system
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ does not react to stopped vehicles.
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀
Cornering

Swerving vehicles

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the


speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
until it is completely within the same lane as into a curve at an appropriate speed.
your vehicle. In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
Swerving vehicles
be detected late or not at all.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐

129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to


these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking,
e.g.
When you approach a curve the system may A Check Control message is displayed if the
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to system fails.
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
Cruise control
After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently. The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the
Driving away buttons on the steering wheel. The system
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
automatically; for example: is insufficient.

▷ On steep inclines.
General information
▷ From behind bumps in the road.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Radar sensor
Hints
For US owners only
Unfavorable conditions
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
Do not use the system if unfavorable
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
stant speed, e.g.:
erned by the following:
▷ On winding roads.
FCC ID:
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ OAYARS3-A
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
Compliance statement:
on a loose road surface.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
cle and cause an accident.◀
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Overview ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few


seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
Buttons on the steering wheel gaged.
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
Press button Function rent speed.
System on/off, interrupt ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
Store speed or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
Resume speed ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
rocker switch: change, hold,
store speed
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed

Controls Hints
Adjusting the desired speed
Switching on
Modify desired speed to road conditions
Press button on the steering wheel.
and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Cruise control can be used.
Press button.
Switch off Or:
Deactivated or interrupted system
With deactivated or interrupted system
use your brakes, steering and moves as usual
to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

Press button.

▷ If active: press twice.


▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
is deleted. terrupted.

Interrupting When the system is switched on, the current


speed is maintained and stored as the desired
When active, press the button. speed.
This is displayed, refer to page 132, in the
The system is automatically interrupted if: speedometer and briefly in the instrument
▷ The brakes are applied. cluster.

131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

When cruise control is maintained or stored, Desired speed


DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned
▷ The marking lights up green:
on if needed.
the system is active.
Changing the speed ▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
interrupted.
until the desired speed is set.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
is switched off.
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to Brief status display
the point of resistance, the desired speed Selected desired speed.
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
past the point of resistance, the desired Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. operations.

The maximum speed that can be set de‐


Displays in the Head-up Display
pends on the vehicle.
Some system information can also be dis‐
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ played in the Head-up Display.
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
PDC Park Distance Control
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the The concept
switch beyond the resistance point causes
PDC is a support when parking. When you
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
Resuming the desired speed
ble - then the object is reported through:
Press button. ▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
General information
Displays in the instrument cluster
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
Indicator lamp the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
6 ft/2 m.
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on. An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.

132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. Switching on/off


5 ft/1.50 m.
To ensure full functionality: Switching on automatically
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
bicycle racks. tion P R.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Automatic deactivation during forward
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not travel
spray the sensors for long periods and
The system switches off when a certain driving
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
distance or speed is exceeded.

Hints Switch the system back on if needed.

Personal responsibility With front PDC: switching on/off


Even an active system does not relieve manually
the driver from personal responsibility while
Press button.
driving.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
▷ On: the LED lights up.
independently react to all traffic situations.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
Display
react when needed - risk of accident.◀

Avoid driving fast with PDC Signal tones


Avoid approaching an object too fast. When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
tive.
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
For technical reasons, the system may other‐ speaker.
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
Overview If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
With front PDC: button in vehicle sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.

Volume
The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐
PDC Park Distance Control justed similar to the sound and volume set‐
tings of the radio.

133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
use. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
Visual warning or after a continuous tone sounds.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that False warnings
are farther away are already displayed on the PDC may issue a warning under the following
Control Display before a signal sounds. conditions even though there is no obstacle
A display appears as soon as Park Distance within the detection range:
Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ In heavy rain.
The range of the sensors is represented in the ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
colors green, yellow and red. with ice.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
played, the reel can be made to PDC:
▷ On rough road surfaces.
"Rear view camera"
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
System limits
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
Limits of ultrasonic measurement smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances: ▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
coats. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
machines. ous tone alternating between the front and
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
aged or out of position.
ger present, the system is again fully func‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as tional.
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind. Malfunction
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other A Check Control message is displayed.
vehicles.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. area on the Control Display.
▷ With moving objects. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To ensure full functionality:
ledges or cargo.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure sors.
such as fences.

134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not At a glance


spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Button in the vehicle

Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 135 Rearview camera
▷ Side View, refer to page 137.
▷ Top View, refer to page 138.
Camera

Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.

Hints The camera lens is located in the handle of the


Check the traffic situation as well tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ Clean the camera lens, refer to page 232.
dent could result from road users or objects
that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ Switching on/off

Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward


travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.

135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Switching on/off manually ▷ They help you to estimate how much


space is needed when parking and maneu‐
Press button.
vering on level pavement.
▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐
▷ On: the LED lights up.
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
▷ Off: the LED goes out. the steering wheel movements.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Turning circle lines


Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. ▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐
posed on the rearview camera image to‐
Activating assistance functions gether with pathway lines.
More than one assistance function can be ac‐ ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐
tive at the same time. sible turning radius on a level road.
▷ Parking aid lines ▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐
"Parking aid lines" ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
tain angle.
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

Obstacle markings can be faded into the image


of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins match the markings of
the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐
▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the tance to the object shown.
image of the rearview camera.

136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Parking using pathway and turning System limits


radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ Detection of objects
dius lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 132.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line. Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.

Display settings Hints


The images from both cameras are shown si‐
Brightness multaneously on the Control Display.
With the rearview camera switched on: Check the traffic situation as well
1. Select the symbol. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
is reached, and press the controller. your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
Contrast side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.


2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

At a glance Switch the system back on if needed.

Button in the vehicle Display


The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.

Side View

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show


Cameras the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ With the Side View switched on:
ture the image.
1. "Contrast"
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 232. System limits
The cameras lidture a maximum range of
Switching on/off 330 ft/100 m.

Switching on/off manually


Press button. Top View
The concept
Automatic deactivation during forward Top View provides assistance in parking and
travel maneuvering. The area around the doors and
The system switches off when a certain driving the road area around the vehicle are shown on
distance or speed is exceeded. the Control Display for this purpose.

138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

General information Cameras


The image is lidtured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
rearview camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.

Hints
The lenses of the Top View camera are located
Check the traffic situation as well
at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ age quality may be impaired by dirt.
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 232.
dent could result from road users or objects
that are not lidtured by the camera.◀
Switching on/off
Overview
Switching on automatically
Button in the vehicle With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward


travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Top View
Switching on/off manually
Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.


▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.

Display

Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display.

139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

When the distance to an object is small, a red track line is continuously adjusted for the
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in steering wheel movement.
the PDC display. "Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ▷ In poor light.
activated. A Check Control message is displayed in some
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ of these situations.
played, it is possible to reel to top view:
"Rear view camera"
Parking assistant
Brightness
The concept
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast
With Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol.


2. Turn the controller until the desired setting This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
is reached, and press the controller. lel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
Displaying the turning radius and on both sides of the vehicle.
pathway lines
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
sible parking line and takes control of steering
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
during the parking procedure.
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way. When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information and instructions issued
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
view camera and react accordingly.
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
A component of the parking assistant is the
The lane line depends on the engaged
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 132.
gear and the current steering angle. The

140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Hints ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐


cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not relieve Suitable parking space
the driver from personal responsibility while
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
driving.
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
independently react to all traffic situations.
your vehicle's length plus approx.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe 4 ft/1.2 m.
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
react when needed - risk of accident.◀

Changes to the parking space Regarding the parking procedure


Changes to the parking space after it was ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
measured are not taken into account by the ▷ Parking brake released.
system. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ must be set where applicable.
dent.◀
Overview
Transporting cargo
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter Button in the vehicle
of the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐
dent.◀

Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curb if need be.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
Parking assistant
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
cle may become damaged.◀

An engine that has been switched off by the


Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces


▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

Ultrasound sensors Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.


White: the system is available but
not activated.

The system is activated.


The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. System status
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

Switching on/off
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
Switching on with the button of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant
Press button. is activated and search for parking space
The LED lights up. active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
The current status of the parking space search spaces at the edge of the road next to the
is indicated on the Control Display. vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
Parking assistant is activated automatically. is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
Switching on with the reverse gear ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
Shift into reverse. tive. Steering control has
The current status of the parking space search been taken over by system.
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
Switch off
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
The system can be deactivated as follows: activated. When the system is deactivated,
▷ Press button. the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
▷ Switch off the ignition.

142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving comfort Controls

Parking using the parking assistant ▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road


surfaces.
Check the traffic situation as well
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐
overcome, such as curbs.
hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and
PDC's signals. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
ger of an accident.◀ clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
vate it if needed.
▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary
The status of the parking space search is
to the desired side for parking.
indicated on the Control Display.
▷ When switching to another function on the
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
Control Display.
play.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
Resume
wheel move. An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if needed.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display. Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.
System limits
Interrupting manually
No parking assistance
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
time:
tance in the following situations:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
▷ In tight curves.
on the Control Display.
▷ Press button. Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Interrupting automatically
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
The system is interrupted automatically in the
roads.
following situations:
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
the instruction on the Control Display. parking space.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:

143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Driving comfort

▷ For small children and animals.


▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.

144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Climate control Controls

Climate control
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Automatic climate control

1 Seat heating, left  53 6 Temperature


2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right  53
3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor

Hints the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐


dow condensation increases.◀
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in

145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Climate control

Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 146, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Manual air distribution gram.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
Temperature
termediate setting. Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.

▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
The automatic climate control reaches this
▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
well.
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
▷ Footwell. and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
Defrosts windows and removes perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
condensation mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ just the set temperature.
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function. Cooling function
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
Rear window defroster engine running.
Press button.
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
off automatically after a certain period of time.
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ting, warmed again.
Air flow, manual
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
Press the left or right side of the but‐ side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow. gine is started.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ The cooling function is switched on automati‐
duced automatically to save battery power. cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
AUTO program condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐
Press button. ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐


Recirculated-air mode
ture are controlled automatically.
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
Depending on the selected temperature and tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
outside influences, the air is directed to the rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
windshield, side windows, upper body, and system then recirculates the air currently
into the footwell. within the vehicle.

146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Climate control Controls

Press button repeatedly to select an Switching the system on/off


operating mode:
Switch off
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Press the left button for the minimum
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
speed.
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Switching on
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ Press any button except
tain amount of time in order to avoid window ▷ Rear window defroster.
fogging.
▷ Seat heating.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if Microfilter
needed.
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
Sufficient ventilation crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ This filter should be replaced during scheduled
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ maintenance, refer to page 210, of your vehi‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ cle.
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀

Automatic climate control with enhanced features

1 Seat heating, left  53 2 Temperature, left

147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Climate control

3 AUTO program 10 Air distribution, right


4 Display 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
5 Maximum cooling 12 Air distribution, left
6 Temperature, right 13 Rear window defroster
7 Seat heating, right  53 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
8 Cooling function clear
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ 15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐
lated-air mode tion

Hints Depending on the selected temperature,


AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
Sufficient ventilation
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
The cooling function, refer to page 149, is
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
gram.
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀ At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Climate control functions in detail
Intensity of the AUTO program
Temperature
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
Turn the ring to set the desired matic intensity control can be changed.
temperature.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The automatic climate control reaches this The selected intensity is shown on the display
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed of the automatic climate control.
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant. Maximum cooling
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
Press button.
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ The system is set to the lowest tem‐
just the set temperature. perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
AUTO program
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
Press button. gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ The function is available above an external
ture are controlled automatically. temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.

148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Climate control Controls

Cooling function Sufficient ventilation


The car's interior can only be cooled with the When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
engine running. tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
Press button.
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ dow condensation increases.◀
ting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and Manual air distribution


side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ Press button repeatedly to select a
gine is started. program:
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program. ▷ Upper body region.

When using the automatic climate control, ▷ Upper body region and footwell.
condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐ ▷ Footwell.
ops that exits underneath the vehicle. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
Automatic recirculated-air control/
driver's side only.
recirculated-air mode
If the windows are fogged over, press the
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
sor.
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
Press button repeatedly to select an gram first.
operating mode:
Press the left or right side of the but‐
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ton: decrease or increase air flow.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
the automatic climate control.
outside air and shuts off automatically.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
may be reduced automatically to save battery
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
power.
manently blocked.
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Rear window defroster
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window Press button.
fogging. The rear window defroster switches
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the off automatically after a certain period of time.
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Climate control

Defrosts windows and removes Ventilation


condensation
Press button. Front ventilation
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.

Adjust air flow with the program active.


If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
sor. arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
Switching the system on/off vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in
Switch off
the upper body region, arrow 3.
Press the left button for the minimum
Toward blue: colder.
speed.
Toward red: warmer.
The set interior temperature for the driver
Switching on
and passenger are not changed.
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's


interior is too hot.
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, ▷ Draft-free ventilation:
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 210, of your vehi‐
cle.

150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Climate control Controls

Ventilation in the rear Preselecting the reel-on time


On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.

Activating the reel-on time


On the Control Display:
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1. 1. "Settings"

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ 2. "Climate"


row 2. 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
Toward blue: colder. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
Toward red: warmer. trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
Parked-car ventilation next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset reel-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly


On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.

151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Interior equipment

Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility

This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system
series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door
the selected options or country versions. This opener.
also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Your service center.
provisions must be observed when using the
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
respective features and systems.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control Control elements on the interior
rearview mirror
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
▷ LED, arrow 1.
in order to program the remote control.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
During programming
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
During programming and before activat‐ quired for programming.
ing a device using the universal garage door
opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ Programming
trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury or damage. General information
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- 1. Switch on the ignition.
held transmitter.◀ 2. Initial setup:

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored Press and hold the left and right button on
functions for the sake of security. the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This

152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Interior equipment Controls

erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds.
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system,
pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized.
of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out
transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system.
med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person.
gin flashing slowly.
To synchronize:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately
15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order
held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐
and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out.
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. Reprogramming individual buttons
6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed.
rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled
code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter.
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior

153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Interior equipment

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Digital compass
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can Overview
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button
and repeatedly press and release the
2 Mirror display
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Mirror display
Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the
Before operation mirror when driving straight.

Before operating a system using the uni‐


Operating concept
versal garage door opener, ensure that there
are no people, animals, or objects within the Various functions can be called up by pressing
range of movement of the remote-controlled the control button with a pointed object, such
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
damage. The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
trol button is pressed:
held transmitter.◀
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
the button within receiving range of the system setting.
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted. Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
Deleting stored functions
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the fer to World map with compass zones.
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐

154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Interior equipment Controls

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more
pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to reel between English "E" and
played.
German "O".

155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Interior equipment

Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ Replace the cover after use
mately 10 seconds. Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.

Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.

The lighter is located next to the ashtray.


Ashtray/cigarette lighter Push in the lighter.

Ashtray The lighter can be removed as


soon as it pops back out.
Opening

Connecting electrical
devices
Hints
Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle

Raise cover. Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐


tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
Emptying increased power consumption.◀
Take out the insert.
Replace the cover after use
Lighter Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
Danger of burns
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Sockets
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so General information
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
themselves.◀
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.

156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Interior equipment Controls

Note In the trunk


The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.

Front center console

The socket is located on the left side in the


trunk.

USB interface for data


transfer
Raise the lid and remove the cover or cigarette
lighter. The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
Rear center console on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Importing Trips.

Hints
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
Remove the cover. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.

157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Interior equipment

Without telephone: overview Hints


Danger of jamming
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in or reaches into the area of
movement of the rear seat backrests when the
middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐
jury or damage may result.◀

The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ Ensuring the stability of the child seat
partment. When installing child restraint systems,
make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
With telephone: overview headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐
rest.◀

Retract the head restraint if needed be‐


fore backrest is folded down

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ With folding head restraints, fold in the head
rest. restraints before folding down the rear seat
backrests, or damage may result.◀

Opening
Through-loading system 1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety
belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐
The concept
other safety belt.
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
down the rear seat backrest.
into the specially designated fixture on the
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts rear window shelf.
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.

158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Interior equipment Controls

3. Push the corresponding head restraint To secure cargo, refer to page 170, with nets
down as far as it will go. or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo lashing eyes.
area to release the rear seat backrest.
Folding down the middle section
1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle
section forward.

5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves


forward slightly.

6. Fold backrest forward.

Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the car's interior during
braking or evasive maneuvers and endan‐
ger the vehicle's occupants.◀

2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on


the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.

159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Storage compartments

Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 161.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to console, refer to page 162.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country Glove compartment
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems. Front passenger side

Note
Hints Close the glove compartment again im‐
No loose objects in the car's interior mediately

Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
rior without securing them; otherwise, they ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
may present a danger to occupants e.g., during cur during accidents.◀
braking and evasive maneuvers.◀
Opening
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀

Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior: Pull the handle.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger The light in the glove compartment switches
side, refer to page 160. on.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 161. Closing
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage Fold cover closed.
compartment, in front of the cupholders,
refer to page 161. Locking
▷ Storage compartment in the front center The glove compartment can be locked with an
armrest, refer to page 161. integrated key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 41, e.g.

160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Storage compartments Controls

This prevents access to the glove compart‐ Compartments in the doors


ment and to the trunk.
Do not stow any breakable objects
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
hotel, without the integrated key. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
Driver's side cident.◀

Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐ Center armrest
mediately
Front
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ A storage compartment is located in the center
cur during accidents.◀ armrest between the front seats.

Opening
Opening

Fold the center armrest up.


Pull the handle.

Repositioning
Closing
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
Fold cover closed.
backwards. It engages in the end positions.

Connection for an external audio


Front storage compartment device
An external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, can be con‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.

Raise the lid to open it.

161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Controls Storage compartments

Storage compartment in the To open: press the button.


rear To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest. Pushing back the covers
Push back the covers before folding up
the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
Cupholders could become damaged.◀

Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot Clothes hooks
drinks
Do not obstruct view
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is When suspending clothing from the
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's view.◀
Unsuitable containers
No heavy objects
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in Do not hang heavy objects from the
damage.◀ hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Front
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.

Storage compartments in the


cargo area
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
Rear Located on the right side is a storage compart‐
In the center armrest. ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 212, and first aid kit, refer to page 224.

Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Storage compartments Controls

Multi-function hook

Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch


at top, if needed, arrow 2.
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the trunk.
The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to Partitioning the compartment
a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg. The compartment can be divided using an at‐
tachable partition.
Lightweight objects only
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐
ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀

Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the right side
trim for fastening small objects.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area


To secure the cargo, refer to page 170, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load, refer to page 170, and to store small
parts.

Storage compartment under the cargo


floor panel
Maximum load
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
20 kg in the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.◀

163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving


Vehicle features and options Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
specific and optional features offered with the
they achieve their full traction potential after a
series. It also describes features that are not
break-in time.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This Drive conservatively for the first
also applies to safety-related functions and 200 miles/300 km.
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Brake system
respective features and systems. Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
Breaking-in period pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ Clutch
other (break-in time). The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
The following instructions will help accomplish level only after a distance driven of approx.
a long vehicle life and good efficiency. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 75.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
vehicle's operating life.
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and General driving notes
100 mph/160 km/h.
▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and Closing the trunk lid
93 mph/150 km/h.
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
stances.
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
increased. ter the vehicle interior.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be


avoided:

166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Things to remember when driving Driving tips

▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. mobile communication devices can interfere
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐
ance that the radiation generated during trans‐
▷ Drive moderately.
mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐
cle interior.◀
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system Hydroplaning
High temperatures are generated in the
Hydroplaning
exhaust system.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot form between the tires and road surface.
exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased loss of contact between the tires and the road
risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
erty damage. steer and brake the vehicle.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Driving through water
Observe water level and speed
Diesel particulate filter Do not exceed the maximum water level
The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐ and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's
cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐ engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐
peratures. mission may be damaged.◀
During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐
Drive though calm water only and only if it is
ing may occur:
not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less height, no faster than walking speed, up to
smoothly. 3 mph/5 km/h.
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐
ing from the exhaust until shortly after the Braking safely
engine is shut down. Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ ard feature.
sary to reach usual performance. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations needed.
Mobile communication devices in the Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
vehicle any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ fort.
hicle Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
It is not recommended to use mobile phones, the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior active mode.
without a direct connection to an external aer‐ In certain braking situations, the perforated
ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and brake discs can cause functional problems.

167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips Things to remember when driving

However, this has no effect on the perform‐ Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
ance and operational reliability of the brake. gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
Objects within the range of movement brake efficiency.
of the pedals You can increase the engine's braking effect
No objects in the area around the pedals by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
function of the pedals could be impeded while
Brake disc corrosion
driving and create the risk of an accident. Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the
brake pads are favored by:
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects. ▷ Low mileage.
Only use floor mats that have been approved ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to used at all.
floor. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ Corrosion will built up when the maximum
tened again after they were removed for clean‐ pressure applied to the brake pads during
ing, e.g.◀ braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Driving in wet conditions Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
press brake pedal ever so gently every few sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
Condensation under the parked
other traffic.
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
The heat generated in this process helps dry
condensation water develops collecting under‐
the brake discs and pads.
neath the vehicle.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
These traces of water under the vehicle are
when you need it.
normal.
Hills
Avoid stressing the brakes
Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes
wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutral


Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀

168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Loading Driving tips

Loading
Vehicle features and options vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

2. Determine the combined weight of the


Hints driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
Overloading the vehicle
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ and passengers from XXX kilograms or
pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. YYY pounds.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
side the tires. This could result in a sudden amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
No fluids in the cargo area 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
aged.◀ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
Heavy and hard objects
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ calculated in Step 4.
vers.◀

Determining the load limit


1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips Loading

Load Securing cargo


Lashing eyes in the trunk

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of


the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are four lashing
less cargo that can be transported. eyes in the cargo area.

Floor net
Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to secure cargo
and store small parts.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the trunk
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of floor.
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described;
otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.

170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Loading Driving tips

Roof-mounted luggage rack ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
Note ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
Roof racks are available as special accessories. ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.

Roof drip rail with flaps

The anchorage points are located in the roof


drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.

Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.

171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips Saving fuel

Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass
This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof
specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to thereby reduces the range.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
Tires
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
General information sumption.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
sions. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip.
erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ronmental impact. tire wear.

Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately


Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold
following use engine up to operating temperature.

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage


racks which are no longer required following
use.
Look well ahead when
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
driving
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.

172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Saving fuel Driving tips

Avoid high engine speeds road conditions, maintenance or environmental


factors.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ Switch off any functions that
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When are not currently needed
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds. Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
and-go traffic.
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed. Reel off these functions if they are not needed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of The ECO PRO driving program supports the
the vehicle, refer to page 84. energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot Have maintenance carried
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
out
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
erator and let the vehicle roll. optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.
The maintenance should be carried out by
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
your service center.
Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
Switch off the engine during to page 210.

longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., ECO PRO
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion. The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
Auto Start/Stop function on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
automatically switches off the engine during a mate control output, are adjusted.
stop. Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
If the engine is switched off and then restarted matically decoupled from the transmission in
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
onds of switching off the engine. D remains engaged.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
mined by other factors, such as driving style, displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.

173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips Saving fuel

The achieved extended range is displayed in ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":


the instrument cluster as bonus range. The output is reduced once the set ECO
PRO speed is reached.
Overview
The system includes the following Coasting
EfficientDynamics functions and displays: Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 174. ing the engine and Coasting, refer to
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 176, with the engine idling.
page 175 This function is only available in ECO PRO
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to mode.
page 174.
ECO PRO climate control
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to
page 176. "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
page 177. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
Activate ECO PRO cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
can be economized.
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument The mirror heating is made available when out‐
cluster. side temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potential


Configuring ECO PRO
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
Display in the instrument cluster
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program. ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
Via the iDrive you extend your driving range.
1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the
2. "ECO PRO mode" bonus range in the instrument
Or cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
1. "Settings"
The bonus range is automatically reset every
2. "Driving mode"
time the vehicle is refueled.
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip


▷ "Tip at:":
Adjust the ECO PRO speed.

174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Saving fuel Driving tips

Efficiency display ECO PRO tip, driving tip

Display in the instrument cluster The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient by backing off the accelerator
for instance.

Note
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

Display in the instrument cluster with extended 1. "Settings"


range 2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info"

ECO PRO tip, symbols


An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure

For efficient driving back off the ac‐


celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style. Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ M/S to D.
celerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the Steptronic transmission/manual
bar's color: transmission: follow shifting instruc‐
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long tions.
as the mark moves within the blue range. Manual transmission: engage neu‐
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by tral for engine stop.
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving
are met.

175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips Saving fuel

Indications on the Control Display Coasting

EfficientDynamics The concept


Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ The system helps to conserve fuel.
ogy can be displayed while driving. To do this, under certain conditions the engine
1. "Vehicle info" is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
2. "EfficientDynamics"
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
Displaying fuel consumption history lever position D remains engaged.
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
ing.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
lected time frame.
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
Trip interruptions are represented below the again.
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history" Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
Adjusting fuel consumption history fer to page 173, driving mode.
time frame Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
Select the symbol. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Resetting fuel consumption history The function is available in a certain speed
1. Open "Options". range.
2. "Reset consumption history" A proactively driving style helps the driver to
use the function as often as possible and sup‐
Displaying EfficientDynamics info ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info" Safety mode

The following systems are displayed: The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
▷ Climate control output. steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
Display ECO PRO tips sive current.
"ECO PRO Tips" ▷ Cruise control activated.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use. Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐

176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Saving fuel Driving tips

prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if Indications on the Control Display
the following conditions are met: The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
operated. is active.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ The distance traveled in the Coasting driving
tion D. condition is indicated by a counter.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The driving status Coast can be influenced
with the shift paddles.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:


driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info


1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ Deactivating the system manually
ometer approximately indicates idle speed. The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to
the zero point during coasting. use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
Display in the instrument cluster with Settings are stored for the profile currently in
extended range use.
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is ECO PRO driving style analysis
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer The concept
approximately indicates idle In this situation the system helps develop an
speed. especially efficient driving style and to con‐
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at serve fuel.
the zero point during coasting. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.

177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Driving tips Saving fuel

The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. Tips about the energy saving driving style,
The range of the vehicle can be extended by Conserving fuel, refer to page 172.
an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.

Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving style


analysis
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. Select the symbol.

Display on the Control Display

The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐


ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.

178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Saving fuel Driving tips

179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Mobility Refueling

Refueling
Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

This chapter describes all standard, country-


specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Hints
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 184, prior to refueling.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀

Diesel engines
The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐ Closing
sel fuel pumps. 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Fuel lid
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Opening Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed
flap. properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap


In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.
The release is located in the trunk.

182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Refueling Mobility

1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To


do this, turn the lid.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump


symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when


refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuels
Observe safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀

183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Fuel

Fuel
Vehicle features and options Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
This chapter describes all standard, country-
US: ASTM 4806–xx
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to xx: comply with the current standard in each
the selected options or country versions. This case.
also applies to safety-related functions and
Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐
systems. The respectively applicable country
age of ethanol
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐
centage than recommended or one with other
types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise
this could damage the engine and fuel supply
Fuel recommendation
system.◀
Note
Recommended fuel grade
General fuel quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
Minimum fuel grade
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor BMW recommends AKI 89.
performance. Switch gas stations or use a Minimum fuel grade
brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
Gasoline formance.◀
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
tent.
when starting at high outside temperatures.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ This has no effect on the engine life.
taining metal must not be used.
Fuel quality
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
out metallic additives.
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
iron, as this can cause permanent damage to ronmental conditions such as high ambient
the catalytic converter and other compo‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur.
nents.◀
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐

184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Fuel Mobility

gine deposits, it is highly recommended to Do not add any diesel additives


purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Do not add additives, including gasoline;
Failure to comply with these recommendations otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
BMW Advanced Diesel
Diesel
The concept
Low-Sulfur Diesel BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel
with low sulfur content: exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx. system. A chemical reaction takes place inside
the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen
xx: comply with the current standard in each
oxides.
case.
The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled.
Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
To be able to start the engine as usual, there
The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must
must be an adequate reducing agent.
not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use
gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong Reducing agent is added by the service center.
fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as
this may damage the engine.◀ Warming up the system
In order to warm the engine up to its operating
After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐
temperature after a cold start, the Steptronic
ice center or Roadside Assistance.
transmission may subsequently shift up to the
If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler next higher gear.
pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that
you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is Displays in the instrument cluster
equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel Reserve indication
cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, This display in the instrument cluster provides
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for information about the distance that can still be
instructions on how to add fuel. driven with the current reserve level.
For additional information regarding Roadside ▷ Lamp white: refill with re‐
Assistance, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐ duction agent at the next
gation, Entertainment and Communication. opportunity.
▷ Lamp yellow: not enough re‐
Winter diesel duction agent present. The
To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐ remaining range is displayed
erational in the winter, use winter diesel. in the instrument cluster. Im‐
It is available at gas stations during winter mediately refill with reduc‐
months. tion agent, refer to
page 186.
The fuel filter heating system, included as a
standard feature, prevents disruption of the
fuel supply while driving.

185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Fuel

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum Diesel exhaust fluid at low


▷ The remaining range is dis‐ temperatures
played in the instrument Due to its physical properties, it is possible
cluster: refill with reduction that the reducing agent may also need to be
agent. The engine will con‐ replenished between regular maintenance ap‐
tinue to run as long as it is pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un‐
not switched off and all der + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducing
other operating conditions agent only immediately before driving off.
are satisfied; sufficient fuel, The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐
e.g. serve display in the instrument cluster.
Engine does not start At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃, the fill‐
Do not continue driving to the limit of the ing level cannot be measured in some cases.
remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will After adding reducing agent, the Reserve Dis‐
not be able to restart the engine after switch‐ play is displayed only until the fill level can be
ing it off. In certain cases, this could cause measured again.
safety to be impaired.◀
Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid
Filling with an incorrect fluid yourself in exceptional cases
A Check Control message is displayed when You can replenish reducing agent yourself in
an incorrect fluid is added. exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service
center.
After adding the incorrect fluid, contact your
service center. Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid
Do not come into contact with the reduc‐
System defect ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations
A Check Control message is displayed when may result.◀
there is a system defect.
Handling Diesel exhaust fluid
Have the diesel exhaust fluid When working with reducing agent in
replenished closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When
The reducing agent is added by the service the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐
center within the context of regular mainte‐ ing fumes may eslide.◀
nance.
Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach
It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐ of children
ished several times under particular circum‐
Keep reducing agent out of reach of children.◀
stances, e.g., if the vehicle is driven in a partic‐
ularly sporty style or if it is driven at high Avoid contact with surfaces
altitudes.
Avoid contact of reduction agent with
The reducing agent must be replenished as surfaces of the vehicle; otherwise, damage
soon as the reserve display appears in the in‐ could occur.◀
strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐
start the engine.
Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid
▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With
this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel

186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Fuel Mobility

exhaust fluid can be replenished simply The vehicle tank will be filled.
and safely. The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐
▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32 tle no longer changes. It is not possible to
Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your overfill.
service center.

Refill quantity
When the Reserve display starts, add at least
3 bottles of reducing agent.
This corresponds to approx. 1.5 US gal/6 liters.

Tank for reducing agent

5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐


screw it.

The tank for the reducing agent is located next


to the fuel tank.

6. Replace the tank lid and turn it clockwise.


Adding the reducing agent
7. Close the fuel filler flap.
Add the reducing agent when the ignition is
switched on.
After adding Diesel exhaust fluid
1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 182.
2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise and re‐ Note
move. Incorrect fluids
3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it After filling with incorrect fluids, such as
will go, see arrow. antifreeze for washer fluid, do not start the en‐
gine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀

Contact your service center.

Disposing of bottles
You take your empty Diesel exhaust
fluid bottles to your service center for
disposal.

4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.

187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Fuel

Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐


hold waste unless this is permitted by local
regulations.

Reserve indication
The Reserve display will still ap‐
pear along with the remaining
range after refilling.
Engine can be started.
After several minutes of driving,
the Reserve indication goes out.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum


After filling, the indication -- is
still displayed.
Only after the display goes out
can the engine -- be started.

1. Switch on the ignition.


Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute.
2. Engine can be started.

188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

Wheels and tires


Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours.
series. It also describes features that are not
The displays of inflation devices may under-
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
provisions must be observed when using the Monitor.
respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure specifications
Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 190, contains all tire inflation pressure
sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure
specifications apply to approved tire sizes and
▷ Road safety. recommended tire brands. This information
▷ Driving comfort. can be obtained from your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following:
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ Tire inflation pressures up to
serve this precaution, you may be driving on 100 mph/160 km/h
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
and the risk of an accident.◀
to page 190, and adjust as necessary.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.

189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI

Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 -


91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 -


89 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 255/35 R 19
door pillar. 92 Y RSC

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -


Maximum permissible speed
90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
Rear: 255/30 R 20
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
92 Y XL RSC

Tire inflation pressure values up to Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of


100 mph/160 km/h T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
320i, 320i xDrive
328i, 328d
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Tire size Pressure specifications
Specifications in in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold
Specifications in
tires
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
M+S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 M+S RSC
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36
225/45 R 18 91 Y M+S A/S RSC
RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
225/45 R 18 95 V RSC
M+S XL RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - M+S XL RSC
94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/45 R 17
98 W RSC

190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35


94 W RSC - 2.2 / 32 M+S A/S RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17 225/45 R 18 91 Y
98 W RSC RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 95 V


91 Y RSC M+S XL RSC
- 2.2 / 32
Rear: 255/40 R 18 Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 -
95 Y RSC 94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - Rear: 255/45 R 17
89 Y RSC 98 W RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/35 R 19 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
92 Y RSC 91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 - Rear: 255/40 R 18
90 Y XL RSC 95 Y RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 -
92 Y XL RSC 89 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Rear: 255/35 R 19
50 mph / 80 km/h 92 Y RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102
M 4.2 / 60 Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -
90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
328i xDrive, 328d xDrive Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
Tire size Pressure specifications
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
in bar/PSI
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
Specifications in M 4.2 / 60
bar/PSI with cold
tires

225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32


M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC

191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

335i, 335i xDrive relevant table on the following pages. Other‐


wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI Tire inflation pressure values over
Specifications in 100 mph/160 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires 320i, 320i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature

225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 Tire size Pressure specifications


M+S A/S RSC in bar/PSI

225/45 R 18 91 Y Specifications in
RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/50 R 17 94 H tires
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V 225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39
M+S XL RSC M+S A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 225/50 R 17 94 H
91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 M+S RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
95 Y RSC M+S A/S RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 225/45 R 18 91 Y
89 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 225/45 R 18 95 V
92 Y RSC M+S XL RSC

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 -


90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Rear: 255/45 R 17
92 Y XL RSC 98 W RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 -


T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h 91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35
M 4.2 / 60 Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
Tire inflation pressures at max. Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 89 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/35 R 19
In order to drive at maximum speeds in 92 Y RSC
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the

192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 - Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -


90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC 92 Y XL RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature 328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications Without high-speed tuning feature
in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifica‐
Specifications in tions in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold Specifications in
tires bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39
M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
225/50 R 17 94 H +S A/S RSC
M+S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 +S RSC
RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
225/45 R 18 95 V +S A/S RSC
M+S XL RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - RSC
94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 95 V M
Rear: 255/45 R 17 +S XL RSC
98 W RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 2.4 / 35 -
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 - 94 W RSC - 2.6 / 38
91 Y RSC - 2.5 / 36 Rear:
Rear: 255/40 R 18 255/45 R 17 98 W
95 Y RSC RSC

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 -


89 Y RSC 91 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38
- 2.6 / 38
Rear: 255/35 R 19 Rear:
92 Y RSC 255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC

193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifications


tions in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 -


89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41
Rear: Rear:
255/35 R 19 92 Y 255/35 R 19 92 Y
RSC RSC

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 - Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 -


90 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 90 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC 92 Y XL RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature 335i, 335i xDrive


Tire size Pressure specifications Without high-speed tuning feature
in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications
Specifications in in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold Specifications in
tires bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 H M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
+S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 M+S A/S RSC
RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y
225/45 R 18 95 V M RSC
+S XL RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.4 / 35 -
94 W RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V
- 2.6 / 38
M+S XL RSC
Rear:
255/45 R 17 98 W Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 -
RSC 91 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 255/40 R 18
91 Y RSC 95 Y RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Rear:
255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC

194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 - Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 -


89 Y RSC - 3.0 / 44 90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49
Rear: 255/35 R 19 Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y RSC 92 Y XL RSC

Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 - Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of


90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
Rear: 255/30 R 20 M 4.2 / 60
92 Y XL RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Tire identification marks
M 4.2 / 60
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
With high-speed tuning feature
245: nominal width in mm
Tire size Pressure specifications
45: aspect ratio in %
in bar/PSI
R: radial tire code
Specifications in
18: rim diameter in inches
bar/PSI with cold
tires 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 Speed letter


RSC
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 H
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
M+S RSC
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 -
91 Y RSC V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
- 2.8 / 41
Rear: 255/40 R 18 W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
95 Y RSC Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -


Tire Identification Number
89 Y RSC - 3.0 / 44
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0115: tire age

195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of Those grades represent the tire's ability to
the U.S. Department of Transportation. stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance.
1st week of 2015. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering,
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
least every 6 years.
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
Temperature A
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Temperature A B C Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law.
grades.
Temperature grade for this tire
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
ernment test course. For example, a tire in combination, can cause heat buildup and
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, possible tire failure.
times as well on the government course as a If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
RSC – Run-flat tires
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 199, are labeled
ing habits, service practices and differences in with a circular symbol containing the letters
road characteristics and climate. RSC marked on the sidewall.

Traction M+S
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Winter and all-season tires with better cold
are AA, A, B, and C. weather performance than summer tires.

196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire tread ioning between the wheel and the road. Be


careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
Summer tires speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
Winter tires dency to pull to the left or right.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
0.16 in/4 mm. curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are In case of tire damage
less suitable for winter operation.
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
Minimum tread depth
rims and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐
ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐
come life threatening for vehicle occupants
and also other traffic.◀

Repair of tire damage


For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
Wear indicators are distributed around the your vehicle recommends that you do not have
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Changing wheels and tires


Tire damage Mounting
General information Information on mounting tires
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Have mounting and balancing performed
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. only by a service center.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
Hints danger of subsequent damage and related
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, safety hazards.◀
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐

197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

Wheel and tire combination New tires


You can ask the service center about the right Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
for the vehicle. they achieve their full traction potential after a
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair break-in time.
the function of a variety of systems such as Drive conservatively for the first
ABS or DSC. 200 miles/300 km.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ Retreaded tires
figuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
Following tire damage, have the original wheel ommend the use of retreaded tires.
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle Retreaded tires
as soon as possible.
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
Approved wheels and tires sign and age of the tire casing structures can
You should only use wheels and tires limit service life and have a negative impact on
that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ road safety.◀
facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g.,
despite having the same official size ratings, Winter tires
variations can lead to chassis contact and with Winter tires are recommended for operating on
it, the risk of severe accidents winter roads.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires,
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore they do not provide the same level of perform‐
cannot guarantee the operating safety of the ance as winter tires.
vehicle.◀
Maximum speed of winter tires
Recommended tire brands If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the
tire specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐


Run-flat tires
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
standards for safety and handling.
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
glad to advise you.

198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

Rotating wheels between axles Changing run-flat tires


Different wear patterns can occur on the front For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
and rear axles depending on individual driving spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
conditions. The tires can be rotated between Your service center will be glad to advise you.
the axles to achieve even wear. Your service
center will be glad to advise you. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct if needed. Mobility System
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the The concept
front and rear axles. With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
Storage travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with into the tires, which seals the damage from the
as little exposure to light as possible. inside.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, The compressor can be used to check the tire
grease and fuels. inflation pressure.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Hints
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
Run-flat tires sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
Label tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact the nearest service center if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
RSC label on the tire sidewall. wheel electronics. In this case, have the
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ electronics checked at the next opportu‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ nity and have them replaced if needed.
cial rims.
Enclosed areas
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
Follow the instructions for continued driving exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
with a flat tire. odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

Storage Filling the tire with sealant


The Mobility System is located under the 1. Shake the sealing container.
cargo floor panel.

Sealing container

2. Take the connection hose completely out


of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐


tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.

1 On/off reel
2 Holder for bottle
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor

200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, reel on the compressor.
ing that it engages audibly.

Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐


5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire nutes
valve of the defective wheel. Do not allow the compressor to run longer than
10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat
and may be damaged.◀

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐


nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at
this point.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ reached:
hicle.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your service center.

Stowing the Mobility System


1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.

201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Wheels and tires

3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ 4. Insert the connector into a power socket
nection hose in suitable material to avoid inside the vehicle.
dirtying the cargo area.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.

Distributing the sealant


Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
12 mph/20 km/h. 2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
To correct the tire inflation pressure turned on or the engine running, reel
1. Stop at a suitable location. on the compressor.
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
valve stem. ton on the compressor.

Continuing the trip


Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐
ble.
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the
compressor.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of the
vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.

Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/55 R 16.

202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Wheels and tires Mobility

▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chains


Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.

203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Engine compartment

Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck


2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box

204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Engine compartment Mobility

Hood Indicator/warning lights


When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
Hints message is displayed.
Working in the engine compartment
Closing the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the Hood open when driving
necessary professional technical training. If you see any signs that the hood is not
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed mediately and close it securely.◀
only by a service center.
Danger of jamming
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
Make sure that the closing path of the
danger of subsequent damage and related
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
safety hazards.◀

Never reach into the engine compart‐


ment
Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine
compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀

Fold down wiper arm


Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
may result in damage.◀
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever


again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.

205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Engine oil

Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Status display
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
The concept
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This The engine oil level is monitored electronically
also applies to safety-related functions and while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
systems. The respectively applicable country play.
provisions must be observed when using the If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
respective features and systems. level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements
General information A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
the driving style and driving conditions.
is displayed.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
case of, for example:
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving.
▷ Break-in the engine. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine. On the Control Display:
▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. 1. "Vehicle info"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level 2. "Vehicle status"
after refueling.
3. "Engine oil level"
Depending on its engine, the vehicle is equip‐
ped with electronic oil measurement or oil Engine oil level display messages
measuring is done with a dipstick.
Different messages appear on the display de‐
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
uring principles: to these messages.
▷ Status display If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
▷ Detailed measurement 125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
page 207.
Engine oil level too low
Add engine oil immediately; otherwise,
an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐
sult in engine damage.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Engine oil Mobility

Too much engine oil 3. "Measure engine oil level"


Have the vehicle checked immediately; 4. "Start measurement"
otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐ The engine oil level is checked and displayed
gine damage.◀ via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Detailed measurement

The concept Adding engine oil


In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale. General information
Gasoline engine: Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum cle before engine oil is added.
level, a check control message is displayed.
Diesel engine: Oil filler neck
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level or an overfilling is detected, a check con‐
trol message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.

General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
Requirements
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
▷ Vehicle is on level road. played in the instrument cluster.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not Adding engine oil
depressed. Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed. Do not add too much engine oil

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ When too much engine oil is added, im‐
perature. mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.◀
Performing a detailed measurement Protect children
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
the engine oil level:
dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐
1. "Vehicle info" ers to prevent health risks.◀
2. "Vehicle status"

207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Engine oil

Engine oil types to add Diesel engine

API CJ-4.
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Engine oil change:
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
Viscosity grades for engine oils you let the service center change the motor oil.
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of


the engine.

Suitable engine oil types


You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Diesel engine

BMW Longlife-04.

Further information regarding the oil specifica‐


tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐
quired with the service center.

Alternative engine oil types


If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior oil rating.

208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Coolant Mobility

Coolant
Vehicle features and options The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the Symbol Meaning
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Maximum
the selected options or country versions. This
Minimum
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Adding
respective features and systems. 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
Hints pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant
may cause burns.◀

Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
suitable additives are available from the service The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
center. the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Coolant level
General information Disposal
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ Comply with the relevant environmen‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the tal protection regulations when dispos‐
left side of the engine compartment. ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks.

209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Maintenance

Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
This chapter describes all standard, country-
continuously stored in the remote control.
specific and optional features offered with the
Your service center will read out this data and
series. It also describes features that are not
suggest the right array of service procedures
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
for your vehicle.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
systems. The respectively applicable country mote control with which the vehicle was driven
provisions must be observed when using the most recently.
respective features and systems.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a service center update the
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ time-dependent maintenance procedures,
erational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if needed,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary activated-charcoal filter.
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Additional information is available from
Service and Warranty
the service center. Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Condition Based Service Canadian models
CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the Maintenance and repair should be performed
amount of maintenance corresponding to your by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
user profile. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
Detailed information on service requirements, vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
refer to page 83, can be displayed on the Con‐ Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
trol Display. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.

210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Maintenance Mobility

Socket for OBD Onboard


Diagnosis
Note
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for onboard diagnostics may
only be used by the service center or a work‐
shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
correspondingly trained personnel and other
authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for


checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.

Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.

211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Replacing components

Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
This chapter describes all standard, country-
to page 71, the wiper arms.
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
the selected options or country versions. This fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the


catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the hood
right side in the trunk in a storage compart‐ Before opening the hood, ensure that the
ment. Open the cover. wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
the windshield to prevent damage.◀

Wiper blade replacement


Lamp and bulb replacement
Note
Do not fold down the wipers without
Hints
wiper blades
Lights and bulbs
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
have not been installed; this may damage the
tion to vehicle safety.
windshield.◀
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar those or
if they have not been described here.

212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Replacing components Mobility

You can obtain a selection of replacement Headlight glass


bulbs at the service center. Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
Danger of burns ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
otherwise, there is a danger of getting
light glass does not need to be changed.
burned.◀
If the headlights do not dim despite driving
Working on the lighting system with the light switched on, increasing humidity
When working on the lighting system, forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
you should always reel off the lights affected to service center check this.
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
Headlight setting
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions The headlight adjustments can be affected by
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐
lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐
Do not perform work/bulb replacement ice after a replacement.
on xenon headlights
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, Front lights, bulb replacement
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage Halogen headlights
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Headlights

Do not touch the bulbs


Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 1 Parking lights


Some items of equipment use light-emitting 2 High beams/headlight flasher
diodes installed behind a cover as a light 3 Low beams
source.
4 Turn signal
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated 5 Daytime running lights
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers Accessing the turn signals and low beams

Do not remove the covers, and never Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Replacing components

Low beams
55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

In the wheel house, loosen the two brackets


and remove the cover.

Turn signal
21-watt bulb, PY21W 2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
from the holder and remove.
1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.

3. Pull the connector off the bulb.


4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn 5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
counterclockwise and remove. strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ place.
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

6. Close the headlight housing with the lid.


Make sure that the lid engages.
7. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Replacing components Mobility

Accessing the daytime running lights, high High beams/headlight flasher


beams/headlight flasher and parking lights 55-watt bulb, H7.
Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
1. Open the hood, refer to page 205. from the holder and remove.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

2. Pull the connector off the bulb.


3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
Parking lights
4. First insert the bulb at the top with the
6-watt bulb, H6W. strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
remove. place.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn 5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
counterclockwise and remove. Make sure that the lid engages.

3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed


in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
4. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.

215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Replacing components

Daytime running lights Headlights


24-watt bulb, PW24W.

1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb


connector.
2. Remove the bulb holder.

1 Parking lights / daytime running lights


2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal

Low beams and high beams are designed with


3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. xenon technology.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse The parking lights and daylight running lights
order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ are made using LED technology.
tom of the bulb holder must be facing
Contact your service center in the event of a
downward. Make sure that the bulb holder
malfunction.
snaps into place.
5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal
6. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
Make sure that the lid engages.

Xenon headlights

Xenon headlights
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlights
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,


please contact your BMW center.

216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Replacing components Mobility

21-watt bulb, PY21W Carefully pull back the wheel house panel,
arrow 2.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.

2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.

2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
socket counterclockwise and remove. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
Remove the bulb.

3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn


counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
verse order of removal. and screw on the wheel house panel.
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Front fog lights Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
35-watt bulb, H8. LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.

217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Replacing components

Tail lights, bulb replacement Removing the exterior tail lamp


1. Open trunk lid.
At a glance
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1,
and remove the cover, arrow 2.

1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp 3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the
4 Tail lights two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The
tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount
5 Outside brake lamp
on the outside.

Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights

General information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
The tail lights feature LED technology. Contact
your service center in the event of a malfunc‐
tion. 4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and
carefully swing it back and out of the rub‐
Use caution when replacing the bulb ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to
Use caution and proceed one step at a hold it in place in order to prevent the tail
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make
age to the tail lights or the vehicle.◀ sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on
the centering pin, arrow 2.

218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Replacing components Mobility

5. Remove the connecting line from the clip component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
on the bulb holder. tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
6. Press and hold the catch at the top on the
connector of the connecting line and re‐
move the connector from the bulb holder.

Replacing the bulbs


1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.

4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.


5. Insert and secure the cover. Make sure that
the tubular seal is not pinched.

Lights in the trunk lid

General information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Inner brake lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make Accessing the lights
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
1. If needed, remove warning triangle, refer to
teners.
page 224, and bracket with the screw‐
driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, re‐
Installing the tail lamp
fer to page 212.
1. Connect the connecting line to the tail
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing move the screws on the trim.
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1 and the inner part onto the centering

3. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid,


starting at the edge and working toward

219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Replacing components

the area around the recessed grips. Make Rear lamp, license plate lamp and
sure that the trim does not become stuck. central brake lamp
4. Carefully swing out the trim. Follow general instructions, refer to page 212.
These lights are made using LED technology.
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner Contact your service center in the event of a
brake lamp malfunction.
1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull
down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐
row 2. Changing wheels
Hints
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
Which is why no spare tire is available.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.

2. Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers‐ Jacking points for the vehicle jack
ing or brake lamp from its socket counter‐
clockwise.
3. Insert the new bulb.

Installing the bulb holder


1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide
pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐
row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐


cated at the positions shown.

Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that
the two exterior holders latch into place. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and
secure. Further information about the battery can be
obtained from your service center.

220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Replacing components Mobility

Battery replacement Power failure


Use approved vehicle batteries only After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
tings updated, e. g.:
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ tions again.
ble.◀ ▷ Time: update.
After a battery replacement, have the battery ▷ Date: update.
registered on the vehicle by the service center ▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
to ensure that all comfort features are fully the system, refer to page 48.
available and that any Check Control mes‐
sages of these comfort features are no longer Disposing of old batteries
displayed.
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
Charging the battery
cling center.
General information Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
that it does not tip over during transport.
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases: Fuses
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives. Hints
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ Replacing fuses
riods, longer than a month. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
Hints tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
Do not connect charging devices to the
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
12 volt socket in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as types and locations are stored in the fuse box
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an in the trunk.
increased power consumption.◀

Starting aid terminals


In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 225, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.

221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Replacing components

In the engine compartment In the trunk


1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.

Fold up the cargo floor panel.

2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.


3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.

Information on the fuse types and locations is


found on a separate sheet.

Attaching the covers


1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.

3. Press down on the holder and tighten the


three screws.

222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Breakdown assistance Mobility

Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Hints

This chapter describes all standard, country- Emergency Request not guaranteed
specific and optional features offered with the For technical reasons, the Emergency
series. It also describes features that are not Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to able conditions.◀
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Overview
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.

Intelligent Emergency Initiating an Emergency Request


Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
The concept button lights up green.
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
quest can be made through this system. Request was initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
General information the Emergency Request can be aborted.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.

223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Breakdown assistance

When the emergency request is received First aid kit


at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes Note
further steps to help you.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
Check the expiration dates of the contents
BMW Response Center can take further
regularly and replace any expired items
steps to help you under certain circum‐
promptly.
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Storage
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request


automatically The first aid kit is located in the trunk in a stor‐
age compartment.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS Jump-starting
button.
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
Warning triangle started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Hints
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀

The warning triangle is located on the inside of To prevent personal injury or damage to both
the trunk lid. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
To remove, loosen the bracket.

224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Breakdown assistance Mobility

Preparation Connecting the cables


Bodywork contact between vehicles 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ tance.
mation can be found on the battery.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ of the cable to the positive terminal of the
cle. battery, or to the corresponding starting
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
consumers in both vehicles. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
Starting aid terminals the battery, or to the corresponding engine
Connecting order or body ground of assisting vehicle.
Connect the jumper cables in the correct 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀ negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine


Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ run for approx. 10 minutes.
tive terminal. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the


battery negative terminal.

225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Breakdown assistance

Tow-starting and towing Tow truck

Note With rear-wheel drive

Tow-starting and towing


For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀

Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
Towing truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Follow the towing instructions
Do not lift the vehicle
Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; may result.◀
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
With xDrive
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, The vehicle should only be transported on a
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐ loading platform.
cle's response.
Do not tow with only the front or rear axle
raised
Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear
axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock
up and the transfer case could be damaged.◀

Do not lift the vehicle


Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀

226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Breakdown assistance Mobility

Steptronic transmission: transporting Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly


your vehicle Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
Note cause damage.◀
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
Therefore, contact a service center in the
pending on local regulations.
event of a breakdown.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
Do not have the vehicle towed identify the vehicle being towed by placing
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ dow.
cur.◀
Tow bar
Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.

The vehicle should only be transported on a Tow rope


loading platform. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Do not lift the vehicle
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
may result.◀

Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ Tow fitting
sitioning the vehicle. The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
Towing other vehicles The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
Hints
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.◀

227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Breakdown assistance

Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 224. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
The tow fitting is in the onboard vehicle tool kit 2. Ignition, refer to page 64, on.
located in a storage compartment on the right 3. Engage third gear.
side in the trunk. Open the cover. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
Tow fitting, information on use
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with ately press on the clutch pedal again.
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
roads only. warning system.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., 6. Have the vehicle checked.
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀

Screw thread for tow fitting

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to


push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Care Mobility

Care
Vehicle features and options Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with
high-pressure washers
This chapter describes all standard, country-
When using high-pressure washers, do not
specific and optional features offered with the
spray the sensors and camera lenses on the
series. It also describes features that are not
outside of the vehicle for long periods and
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country Automatic car washes
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems. Hints
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
Car washes avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
General information damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Regularly remove foreign objects such as ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
leaves in the area below the windshield when may be damaged, depending on the width
the hood is raised. of the vehicle.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ page 70, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
age the vehicle. vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
Hints be triggered by the interior motion sensor
Steam jets or high-pressure washers of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
When using steam jets or high-pressure tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away refer to page 45.
and use a maximum temperature of Guide rails in car washes
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ could be damaged.◀
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
sively high pressures or temperatures can
Before driving into a car wash
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage. In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀ Manual transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.


2. Shift to neutral.

229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Care

3. Switch the engine off. ▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
4. Switch on the ignition. from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
1. Drive into the car wash. ice scraper.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Switch the engine off. After washing the vehicle
In this way, the ignition remains switched After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
played. can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
wash
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ wiper blade wear.
gaged and damages can result.◀

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside


when in selector lever position N. A signal Vehicle care
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle. Car care products
To start the engine with manual transmission: BMW recommends using care and cleaning
products from BMW, since these have been
1. Press on the clutch pedal. tested and approved.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Car care and cleaning products
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
Follow the instructions on the container.
sion:
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
1. Depress the brake pedal. windows.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ cles.
ping on the brake turns the ignition off. Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ Vehicle paint
cally:
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
▷ When the ignition is switched off. value retention. Environmental influences in
▷ After approx. 15 minutes. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
Headlights fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
influences.
acidic cleansers.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐

230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Care Mobility

mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
tered or discolored. turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
Leather care can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
Remove dust from the leather often, using a components, such as the brake disk.
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime Chrome surfaces
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
wear and premature degradation of the leather tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
surface. of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
To guard against discoloration, such as from ularly when they have been exposed to road
clothing, provide leather care roughly every salt.
two months.
Rubber components
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Aside from water, treat only with rubber
more visible. cleansers.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
grease will gradually break down the protective silicon-containing car care products in order to
layer of the leather surface. avoid damage or noises.

Suitable care products are available from the


Fine wood parts
service center.
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
Upholstery material care nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage Plastic components
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
These include:
with a suitable interior cleaner.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ▷ Roofliner.
material vigorously. ▷ Lamp lenses.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are Clean with a microfiber cloth.
closed.◀
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Caring for special components
No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
Light-alloy wheels vents
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam

231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Mobility Care

grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead Displays/monitors


to surface damage.◀
Cleaning displays and screens
Do not use any chemical or household
Safety belts cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and fected.◀
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Keeping out moisture
Chemical cleaning
Keep all fluids and moisture away from
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the unit; otherwise, electrical components can
the webbing.◀
be damaged.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles. Avoid pressure

Do not allow the reels to retract the safety Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
belts until they are dry. and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,
damage can result.◀
Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
No objects in the area around the pedals
Long-term
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
function of the pedals could be impeded while three months, special measures must be
driving and create the risk of an accident. taken. Additional information is available from
the service center.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
floor.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, e.g.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐


rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.

232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Care Mobility

233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15


Reference Technical data

Technical data
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Note
The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on informa‐
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, from the service center.
for example, due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority.
measurement method. Detailed values can be

Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

BMW 3 Series Limousine

Width with mirrors inches/mm 80.0/2,031

Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811

Height inches/mm 56.3–56.5/1,429–


1,434

Length inches/mm 182.2/4,627

Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1–38.4/11.3–11.7

Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with Step‐
cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ tronic transmission.

236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Technical data Reference

320i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,355/4,400


kg 1,975/1,996

Load lbs 900


kg 408

Approved front axle load lbs 2,005


kg 909

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,525


kg 1,145

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

328i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,420/4,455


kg 2,005/2,021

Load lbs 900


kg 408

Approved front axle load lbs 2,040


kg 925

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,545


kg 1,154

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Technical data

335i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,565/4,585


kg 2,071/2,080

Load lbs 900


kg 408

Approved front axle load lbs 2,160


kg 980

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,570


kg 1,166

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

320i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,542/4,585


kg 2,060/2,080

Load lbs 900


kg 408

Approved front axle load lbs 2,140


kg 971

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,580


kg 1,170

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Technical data Reference

328i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,610


kg 2,091

Load lbs 900


kg 408

Approved front axle load lbs 2,170


kg 984

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,580


kg 1,170

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

335i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,695/4,720


kg 2,130/2,141

Load lbs 900


kg 408

Approved front axle load lbs 2,280


kg 1,034

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,580


kg 1,170

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Technical data

328d

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,420


kg 2,005

Load lbs 860


kg 390

Approved front axle load lbs 2,015


kg 914

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,535


kg 1,150

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

328d xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,620


kg 2,096

Load lbs 860


kg 390

Approved front axle load lbs 2,170


kg 984

Approved rear axle load lbs 2,580


kg 1,170

Approved roof load capacity lbs 165


kg 75

Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.0


Liters 480

240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Technical data Reference

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to


Diesel: 15/57 page 184

241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z
Index
A All around the steering Automatic transmission, see
wheel 14 Steptronic transmission 72
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-season tires, refer to Win‐ AUTO program, automatic cli‐
tem 119 ter tires 198 mate control 148
ACC, Active Cruise Control All-wheel-drive 120 AUTO program, climate con‐
with Stop & Go 124 Alternating-code hand-held trol 146
Acceleration Assistant, refer transmitter 153 AUTO program, intensity 148
to Launch Control 75 Alternative oil types 208 Auto Start/Stop function 66
Accessories and parts 7 Ambient light 96 Average fuel consumption 87
Activated-charcoal filter 150 Antifreeze, washer fluid 71 Average speed 87
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Antilock Brake System, Axle loads, weights 236
tion 116 ABS 119
Active Cruise Control with Anti-slip control, refer to B
Stop & Go, ACC 124 DSC 119
Adaptive brake lights, refer to Approved axle load 236 Backrest curvature, refer to
Brake force display 118 Approved engine oils, see Lumbar support 52
Adaptive Light Control 93 Suitable engine oil Backrest, width 52
Additives, oil 208 types 208 Band-aids, refer to First aid
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Arrival time 88 kit 224
straints 50 Ash tray 156 Bar for tow-starting/
After washing vehicle 230 Assistance when driving towing 227
Airbags 97 off 123 Battery replacement, vehicle
Airbags, indicator/warning Assist system information, on battery 221
light 98 Control Display 90 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Attentiveness assistant 118 remote control 35
culated-air mode 146, 149 AUTO intensity 148 Battery, vehicle 220
Air, dehumidifying, refer to Automatic car wash 229 Belts, safety belts 53
Cooling function 146, 149 Automatic climate con‐ Beverage holder, cu‐
Air distribution, trol 145 pholder 162
manual 146, 149 Automatic climate control Blinds, sun protection 47
Air flow, air conditioner 146 with enhanced features 147 BMW Advanced Diesel 185
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic Cruise Control BMW Assist, see user's
control 149 with Stop & Go 124 manual for Navigation, En‐
Air pressure, tires 189 Automatic Curb Monitor 58 tertainment and Communi‐
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Automatic deactivation, front- cation
tion 150 seat passenger airbags 99 BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
Alarm system 44 Automatic headlight con‐ BMW Homepage 6
Alarm, unintentional 45 trol 93 BMW Internet page 6
All around the center con‐ Automatic locking 44 BMW maintenance sys‐
sole 16 Automatic recirculated-air tem 210
All around the roofliner 17 control 149 Bonus range, ECO PRO 174

242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Everything from A to Z Reference

Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Cargo, securing 170 Cleaning displays 232
pholders 162 Cargo straps, securing Climate control 145, 147
Brake assistant 119 cargo 170 Clock 82
Brake discs, break-in 166 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ Closing/opening via door
Brake force display 118 trol 34 lock 39
Brake lights, adaptive 118 Carpet, care 232 Closing/opening with remote
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Car wash 229 control 37
play 118 Catalytic converter, refer to Clothes hooks 162
Brake pads, break-in 166 Hot exhaust system 167 Coasting 176
Braking, hints 167 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Coasting with engine decou‐
Breakdown assistance 223 ice 210 pled, coasting 176
Break-in 166 CD/Multimedia, see user's Coasting with idling en‐
Brightness of Control Dis‐ manual for Navigation, En‐ gine 176
play 90 tertainment and Communi‐ Cockpit 14
Bulb replacement 212 cation Cold starting, refer to Starting
Bulb replacement, front 213 Center armrest 161 the engine 65
Bulb replacement, halogen Center console 16 Combination reel, refer to
headlights 213 Central locking system 39 Turn signals 69
Bulb replacement, rear 218 Central screen, refer to Con‐ Combination switch, refer to
Bulb replacement, xenon trol Display 18 Wiper system 69
headlights 216 Changes, technical, refer to Comfort Access 41
Bulbs and lights 212 Safety 7 COMFORT program, Dy‐
Button, RES 127 Changing parts 212 namic Driving Control 122
Button, Start/Stop 64 Changing wheels 220 Compartments in the
Bypassing, refer to Jump- Changing wheels/tires 197 doors 161
starting 224 Chassis number, see vehicle Compass 154
identification number 9 Compressor 199
C Check Control 78 Computer, refer to On-board
Checking the engine oil level computer 86
California Proposition 65 electronically 206 Condensation on win‐
Warning 7 Checking the oil level elec‐ dows 150
Camera lenses, care 232 tronically 206 Condensation under the vehi‐
Camera, rearview cam‐ Children, seating position 60 cle 168
era 135 Children, transporting Condition Based Service
Camera, Side View 138 safely 60 CBS 210
Camera, Top View 139 Child restraint fixing sys‐ Configuring driving pro‐
Can holder, refer to Cuphold‐ tem 60 gram 123
ers 162 Child restraint fixing system Confirmation signal 44
Car battery 220 LATCH 62 ConnectedDrive, see user's
Car care products 230 Child restraint fixing systems, manual for Navigation, En‐
Care, displays 232 mounting 60 tertainment and Communi‐
Care, vehicle 230 Child safety locks 63 cation
Cargo 169 Child seat, mounting 60 ConnectedDrive Services
Cargo area, enlarging 158 Child seats 60 Connecting electrical devi‐
Cargo area, storage compart‐ Chrome parts, care 231 ces 156
ments 162 Cigarette lighter 156

243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Everything from A to Z

Continued driving with a flat Diesel exhaust fluid, at low Driving stability control sys‐
tire 102, 105 temperatures 186 tems 119
Control Display 18 Diesel exhaust fluid, having Driving style analysis 177
Control Display, settings 89 refilled 186 Driving tips 166
Controller 18, 19 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Control systems, driving sta‐ mum 186 trol 119
bility 119 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐ DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
Convenient opening with the ishing yourself 186 trol 120
remote control 37 Diesel particulate filter 167 Dynamic Damping Con‐
Coolant 209 Digital clock 82 trol 121
Coolant level 209 Digital compass 154 Dynamic Stability Control
Coolant temperature 82 Dimensions 236 DSC 119
Cooling function 146, 149 Dimmable exterior mirrors 58 Dynamic Traction Control
Cooling, maximum 148 Dimmable interior rearview DTC 120
Cooling system 209 mirror 59
Cornering light 93 Direction indicator, refer to E
Corrosion on brake discs 168 Turn signals 69
Cosmetic mirror 156 Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO 173
Courtesy lamps during un‐ ment cluster 77 ECO PRO, bonus range 174
locking 37 Display in windshield 90 ECO PRO display 173
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO driving mode 173
cle locked 38 strument lighting 95 ECO PRO driving style analy‐
Cruise control 130 Displays, cleaning 232 sis 177
Cruise control, active with Disposal, coolant 209 ECO PRO mode 173
Stop & Go 124 Disposal, vehicle battery 221 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
Cruising range 82 Distance control, refer to struction 175
Cupholders 162 PDC 132 EfficientDynamics 176
Current fuel consumption 83 Distance to destination 87 Electronic displays, instru‐
Divided screen view, split ment cluster 77
D screen 23 Electronic oil measure‐
Door lock 39 ment 206
Damage, tires 197 Door lock, refer to Remote Electronic Stability Program
Damping control, dy‐ control 34 ESP, refer to DSC 119
namic 121 Drive-off assistant 123 Emergency detection, remote
Data, technical 236 Drive-off assistant, refer to control 35
Date 82 DSC 119 Emergency release, fuel filler
Daytime running lights 93 Driver assistance, refer to In‐ flap 182
Defrosting, refer to defrosting telligent Safety 106 Emergency Request 223
the windows 146 Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ Emergency start function, en‐
Defrosting, refer to Windows, telligent Safety 106 gine start 35
defrosting 150 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency unlocking, trans‐
Defrosting the windows 146 trol 121 mission lock 75
Dehumidifying, air 146, 149 Driving instructions, break- Emergency unlocking, trunk
Deleting personal data 25 in 166 lid 41
Deletion of personal data 25 Driving mode 121 Energy Control 83
Destination distance 87 Driving notes, general 166 Energy recovery 83

244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Everything from A to Z Reference

Engine, automatic Start/Stop F Fuel consumption, refer to


function 66 Average fuel consump‐
Engine, automatic switch- Failure message, see Check tion 87
off 66 Control 78 Fuel filler flap 182
Engine compartment 204 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel gauge 81
Engine compartment, work‐ tional alarm 45 Fuel lid 182
ing in 205 Fan, refer to Air Fuel quality 184
Engine coolant 209 flow 146, 149 Fuel recommendation 184
Engine idling when driving, Filler neck for engine oil 207 Fuel, tank capacity 241
coasting 176 Fine wood, care 231 Fuse 221
Engine oil 206 First aid kit 224
Engine oil, adding 207 Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ G
Engine oil additives 208 ting 227
Engine oil change 208 Flat tire, changing Garage door opener, refer to
Engine oil filler neck 207 wheels 220 Universal Integrated Remote
Engine oil temperature 81 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 104 Control 152
Engine oil types, alterna‐ Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gasoline 184
tive 208 tor TPM 100 Gear change, Steptronic
Engine oil types, ap‐ Flat tire, warning transmission 73
proved 208 lamp 101, 104 Gear shift indicator 84
Engine start during malfunc‐ Flooding 167 General driving notes 166
tion 35 Floor carpet, care 232 Glare shield 156
Engine start, jump-start‐ Floor mats, care 232 Glass sunroof, powered 47
ing 224 Fogged up windows 146 Glove compartment 160
Engine start, refer to Starting Fold down the rear seat back‐ Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
the engine 65 rest, see Though-loading proved 236
Engine stop 66 system 158
Engine temperature 81 Fold-out position, wiper 71 H
Entering a car wash 229 Foot brake 167
Equipment, interior 152 Front airbags 97 Handbrake, refer to parking
Error displays, see Check Front-end collision warning brake 68
Control 78 with braking function 109 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Front-end collision warning nating code 153
gram, refer to DSC 119 with City Braking func‐ Hazard warning flashers 223
Exchanging wheels/tires 197 tion 107 Head airbags 97
Exhaust system 167 Front fog lights 95 Headlight control, auto‐
Exterior mirror, automatic Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ matic 93
dimming feature 58 placement 217 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
Exterior mirrors 57 Front lights 213 ture 93
External start 224 front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight flasher 69
External temperature dis‐ automatic deactivation 99 Headlight glass 213
play 82 Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlights 213
External temperature warn‐ indicator lamp 99 Headlights, care 230
ing 82 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 104 Headlight washer system 69
Eyes for securing cargo 170 Fuel 184 Head restraints 50
Fuel consumption, current 83 Head restraints, front 54

245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Everything from A to Z

Head restraints, rear 55 Individual settings, refer to Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐


Head-up Display 90 Personal Profile 35 sion 73
Head-up Display, care 232 Inflation pressure, tires 189 Jump-starting 224
Heavy cargo, stowing 170 Inflation pressure warning
Height, vehicle 236 FTM, tires 104 K
High-beam Assistant 94 Info display, refer to On-
High beams 69 Board computer 86 Key/remote control 34
High beams/low beams, refer Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
to High-beam Assistant 94 tor TPM 101 Access 41
Hills 168 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Key Memory, refer to Per‐
Hill start assistant, refer to FTM 104 sonal Profile 35
Drive-off assistant 123 Instrument cluster 77 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
Hints 6 Instrument cluster, electronic mission 73
Holder for beverages 162 displays 77 Knee airbag 98
Homepage 6 Instrument lighting 95
Hood 205 Integrated key 34 L
Horn 14 Integrated Owner's Manual in
Hotel function, trunk lid 41 the vehicle 30 Lamp replacement 212
Hot exhaust system 167 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lamp replacement, front 213
HUD Head-up Display 90 quest 223 Lamp replacement, rear 218
Hydroplaning 167 Intelligent Safety 106 Lane departure warning 114
Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Lane margin, warning 114
I gram 148 Language on Control Dis‐
Interior equipment 152 play 90
Ice warning, see External Interior lights 95 Lashing eyes, securing
temperature warning 82 Interior lights during unlock‐ cargo 170
Icy roads, see External tem‐ ing 37 LATCH child restraint sys‐
perature warning 82 Interior lights with the vehicle tem 62
Identification marks, tires 195 locked 38 Launch Control 75
Identification number, see ve‐ Interior motion sensor 45 Leather, care 231
hicle identification num‐ Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐
ber 9 matic dimming feature 59 odes 213
iDrive 18 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ Length, vehicle 236
Ignition key, refer to Remote pass 154 Letters and numbers, enter‐
control 34 Interior rearview mirror, man‐ ing 25
Ignition off 64 ually dimmable 59 Light alloy wheels, care 231
Ignition on 64 Internet page 6 Light control 93
Indication of a flat Interval display, service re‐ Light-emitting diodes,
tire 101, 104 quirements 83 LEDs 213
Indicator and alarm lamps, Interval mode 70 Lighter 156
see Check Control 78 Lighting 92
Indicator lamp, see Check J Lights 92
Control 78 Lights and bulbs 212
Individual air distribu‐ Jacking points for the vehicle Light switch 92
tion 146, 149 jack 220 Load 170
Loading 169

246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Everything from A to Z Reference

Lock, door 39 Manual operation, rearview N


Locking/unlocking via door camera 136
lock 39 Manual operation, Side Navigation, see user's manual
Locking/unlocking with re‐ View 138 for Navigation, Entertain‐
mote control 37 Manual operation, Top ment and Communication
Locking, automatic 44 View 139 Neck restraints, front, refer to
Locking, settings 43 Manual transmission 72 Head restraints 54
Locking via trunk lid 40 Marking on approved Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Lock, power window 47 tires 198 Head restraints 55
Locks, doors, and win‐ Marking, run-flat tires 199 Neutral cleaner, see wheel
dows 63 Master key, refer to Remote cleaner 231
Low beams 92 control 34 New wheels and tires 197
Low beams, automatic, refer Maximum cooling 148 Nylon rope for tow-starting/
to High-beam Assistant 94 Maximum speed, display 85 towing 227
Lower back support 52 Maximum speed, winter
Low-Sulfur Diesel 185 tires 198 O
Luggage rack, see Roof- Measure, units of 90
mounted luggage rack 171 Medical kit 224 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 211
Lumbar support 52 Memory, seat, mirror 56 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
Menu, EfficientDynamics 176 agnosis 211
M Menu in instrument clus‐ Obstacle marking, rearview
ter 86 camera 136
Maintenance 210 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐
Maintenance require‐ Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ ommended fuel grade 184
ments 210 ing concept 20 Odometer 82
Maintenance, service require‐ Messages, see Check Con‐ Office, see user's manual for
ments 83 trol 78 Navigation, Entertainment
Maintenance system, Microfilter 147, 150 and Communication
BMW 210 Minimum tread, tires 197 Oil 206
Make-up mirror 156 Mirror 57 Oil, adding 207
Malfunction displays, see Mirror memory 56 Oil additives 208
Check Control 78 Mobile communication devi‐ Oil change 208
Manual air distribu‐ ces in the vehicle 167 Oil change interval, service
tion 146, 149 Mobility System 199 requirements 83
Manual air flow 146, 149 Modifications, technical, refer Oil filler neck 207
Manual mode, Steptronic to Safety 7 Oil types, alternative 208
transmission 74 Moisture in headlight 213 Oil types, approved 208
Manual operation, door Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Old batteries, disposal 221
lock 39 play 18 On-board computer 86
Manual operation, exterior Mounting of child restraint Onboard monitor, refer to
mirrors 58 systems 60 Control Display 18
Manual operation, fuel filler Multifunction steering wheel, Onboard vehicle tool kit 212
flap 182 buttons 14 Opening/closing via door
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ lock 39
tance Control PDC 133 Opening and closing 34

247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Everything from A to Z

Opening and closing, without Pinch protection system, win‐ Refueling 182
remote control 39 dows 46 Remaining range 82
Opening and closing, with re‐ Plastic, care 231 Remote control/key 34
mote control 37 Power failure 221 Remote control, malfunc‐
Opening the trunk lid with no- Power sunroof, glass 47 tion 38
touch activation 42 Power windows 46 Remote control, univer‐
Operating concept, iDrive 18 Pressure, tire air pres‐ sal 152
Optional equipment, standard sure 189 Replacement fuse 221
equipment 6 Pressure warning FTM, Replacing parts 212
Outside air, refer to Auto‐ tires 104 Replacing wheels/tires 197
matic recirculated-air con‐ Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Reporting safety defects 9
trol 149 file 35 RES button 127
Overheating of engine, refer Programmable memory but‐ RES button, see Active
to Coolant temperature 82 tons, iDrive 24 Cruise Control, ACC 124
Protective function, glass RES button, see Cruise con‐
P sunroof 48 trol 130
Protective function, win‐ Reserve warning, refer to
Paint, vehicle 230 dows 46 Range 82
Parallel parking assistant 140 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
Park Distance Control Controller 18, 19 TPM 101
PDC 132 Retaining straps, securing
Parked-car ventilation 151 R cargo 170
Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Retreaded tires 198
tion 168 Radiator fluid 209 Roadside parking lights 93
Parking aid, refer to PDC 132 Radio-operated key, refer to Roller sunblinds 47
Parking assistant 140 Remote control 34 RON recommended fuel
Parking brake 68 Radio ready state 64 grade 184
Parking lights 92 Radio, see user's manual for Roofliner 17
Particulate filter 167 Navigation, Entertainment Roof load lidacity 236
Parts and accessories 7 and Communication Roof-mounted luggage
Passenger side mirror, tilting Rain sensor 70 rack 171
downward 58 Rear lights 220 Rope for tow-starting/
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Rear socket 157 towing 227
era 136 Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ RSC Run Flat System Com‐
PDC Park Distance Con‐ ment 218 ponent, refer to Run-flat
trol 132 Rearview camera 135 tires 199
Pedestrian warning with city Rearview mirror 57 Rubber components,
braking function 112 Rear window de‐ care 231
Personal Profile 35 froster 146, 149 Run-flat tires 199
Personal Profile, exporting Recirculated-air filter 150
profiles 36 Recirculated-air S
Personal Profile, importing mode 146, 149
profiles 37 Recommended fuel Safe braking 167
Pinch protection system, grade 184 Safety 7
glass sunroof 48 Recommended tire
brands 198

248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Everything from A to Z Reference

Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Status control display,
er's seat and front passen‐ ror 56 tires 101
ger seat 54 Shift paddles on the steering Status information, iDrive 23
Safety belts 53 wheel 74 Status of Owner's Manual 7
Safety belts, care 232 Side airbags 97 Steering assistance 123
Safety switch, windows 47 Side View 137 Steering wheel, adjusting 59
Safety systems, airbags 97 Signaling, horn 14 Steering wheel heating 59
Saving fuel 172 Signals when unlocking 44 Steptronic Sport transmis‐
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ Sitting safely 50 sion, refer to Steptronic
play 18 Size 236 transmission 72
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ Slide/tilt glass roof 47 Steptronic transmission 72
hicle tool kit 212 Smallest turning radius 236 Stopping the engine 66
Screw thread, see screw Snow chains 202 Storage compartment in the
thread for tow fitting, screw Socket 156 rear 162
thread for tow fitting 228 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storage compartments 160
Sealant 199 nostics 211 Storage compartments, loca‐
Seat and mirror memory 56 Soot particulate filter 167 tions 160
Seat belts, refer to Safety SOS button 223 Storage, tires 199
belts 53 Spare fuse 221 Storing the vehicle 232
Seat heating, front 53 Specified engine oil Suitable engine oils 208
Seat heating, rear 53 types 208 Summer tires, tread 197
Seating position for chil‐ Speed, average 87 Sun visor 156
dren 60 Speed limit detection, on- Supplementary text mes‐
Seats 50 board computer 88 sage 81
Selection list in instrument Speed limiter, display 85 Surround View 135
cluster 86 Speed Limit Information 85 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
Selector lever, Steptronic Speed warning 88 ing 121
transmission 73 Split screen 23 Switch-on times, parked-car
Sensors, care 232 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic ventilation 151
Service and warranty 8 Driving Control 122 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14
Service requirements, Condi‐ Sport displays, torque dis‐ Symbols 6
tion Based Service play, performance dis‐ Symbols in the status field 23
CBS 210 play 88
Service requirements, dis‐ SPORT program, Dynamic T
play 83 Driving Control 122
Services, ConnectedDrive Sport program, transmis‐ Tachometer 81
Servotronic 123 sion 74 Tail lights 218
SET button, see Active Sport steering, variable 121 Technical changes, refer to
Cruise Control, ACC 124 Stability control systems 119 Safety 7
SET button, see Cruise con‐ Start/stop, automatic func‐ Technical data 236
trol 130 tion 66 Telephone, see user's manual
Settings, locking/unlock‐ Start/Stop button 64 for Navigation, Entertain‐
ing 43 Start function during malfunc‐ ment and Communication
Settings on Control Dis‐ tion 35 Temperature, automatic cli‐
play 89 Starting the engine 65 mate control 146, 148

249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Reference Everything from A to Z

Temperature display for ex‐ Transmission, manual trans‐ V


ternal temperature 82 mission 72
Temperature, engine oil 81 Transmission, Steptronic Vanity mirror 156
Tempomat, refer to Active transmission 72 Variable sport steering 121
Cruise Control 124 Transporting children Vehicle battery 220
Terminal, starting aid 225 safely 60 Vehicle battery, replac‐
Text message, supplemen‐ Tread, tires 197 ing 221
tary 81 Trip computer 88 Vehicle, break-in 166
Theft alarm system, refer to Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle care 230
Alarm system 44 tion 69 Vehicle features and op‐
Thigh support 52 Trip odometer 82 tions 6
Through-loading system 158 Truck for tow-starting/ Vehicle identification num‐
Tilt alarm sensor 45 towing 226 ber 9
Time of arrival 88 Trunk lid closing 40 Vehicle jack 220
Tire damage 197 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle paint 230
Tire identification marks 195 ing 41 Vehicle storage 232
Tire inflation pressure 189 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Vehicle wash 229
Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Trunk lid opening 40 Ventilation 150
tor, refer to FTM 104 Trunk lid, opening with no- Ventilation, refer to Parked-
Tire Pressure Monitor touch activation 42 car ventilation 151
TPM 100 Trunk lid via remote con‐ VIN, see vehicle identification
Tires, changing 197 trol 38 number 9
Tire sealant 199 Turning circle 236 Voice activation system 27
Tires, everything on wheels Turning circle lines, rearview
and tires 189 camera 136 W
Tires, run-flat tires 199 Turn signals, operation 69
Tire tread 197 Warning and indicator lamps,
Tone, see user's manual for U see Check Control 78
Navigation, Entertainment Warning displays, see Check
and Communication Unintentional alarm 45 Control 78
Tool 212 Units of measure 90 Warning messages, see
Top View 138 Universal remote control 152 Check Control 78
Total vehicle weight 236 Unlock button, Steptronic Warning triangle 224
Touchpad 21 transmission 73 Warranty 7
Tow fitting 227 Unlocking/locking via door Washer fluid 71
Towing 226 lock 39 Washer nozzles, wind‐
Tow lug, see Tow fitting 227 Unlocking/locking with re‐ shield 71
Tow-starting 226 mote control 37 Washer system 69
Tow truck 226 Unlocking, settings 43 Washing, vehicle 229
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Updates made after the edito‐ Water on roads 167
tor 100 rial deadline 7 Weights 236
Traction control 120 Upholstery care 231 Welcome lamps during un‐
TRACTION, driving dynam‐ USB interface 157 locking 37
ics 120 Welcome lights 92
Transmission lock, electronic Wheel base, vehicle 236
unlocking 75 Wheel cleaner 231

250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
Everything from A to Z Reference

Wheels, changing 197


Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 189
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 104
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 100
Width, vehicle 236
Window defroster,
rear 146, 149
Windows, powered 46
Windshield washer fluid 71
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 71
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 69
Windshield wiper 69
Winter diesel 185
Winter storage, care 232
Winter tires, suitable
tires 198
Winter tires, tread 197
Wiper 69
Wiper blades, replacing 212
Wiper fluid 71
Wiper, fold-out position 71
Wiper system 69
Wood, care 231
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 212

X
xDrive 120
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 216

251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15
More about BMW

The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®

01 40 2 960 440 ue

*BL296044000V*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15